Yamaha DSP-AX3200 Manual de usuario

Marca: Yamaha

Modelo: DSP-AX3200

Categoría: Amplificadores de audio

Tipo: Manual de usuario

DSP-AX3200

AV AMPLIFIER

AMPLIFICATEUR AUDIO-VIDEO

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.

YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA

YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, F.R. OF GERMANY

YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD1 7JS, ENGLAND

YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN

YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA

Printed in Japan

V817900

OWNER’S MANUAL

MODE D’EMPLOI

BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG

BRUKSANVISNING

MANUALE DI ISTRUZIONI

MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES

GEBRUIKSAANWIJZING

DSP-AX3200

CAUTION

1 To assure the finest performance, please read this

manual carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future

reference.

2 Install this unit in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean

place with at least 30 cm on the top, 20 cm on the

right and left, and 10 cm at the back of this unit

— away from direct sunlight, heat sources,

vibration, dust, moisture, and/or cold.

3 Locate this unit away from other electrical

appliances, motors, or transformers to avoid

humming sounds. To prevent fire or electrical

shock, do not place this unit where it may get

exposed to rain, water, and/or any type of liquid.

4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature

changes from cold to hot, and do not locate this

unit in a environment with high humidity (i.e. a

room with a humidifier) to prevent condensation

inside this unit, which may cause an electrical

shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal

injury.

5 On the top of this unit, do not place:

– Other components, as they may cause damage

and/or discoloration on the surface of this unit.

– Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may

cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal

injury.

– Containers with liquid in them, as they may

cause electrical shock to the user and/or

damage to this unit.

6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper,

tablecloth, curtain, etc. in order not to obstruct

heat radiation. If the temperature inside this unit

rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or

personal injury.

7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all

connections are complete.

8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may

overheat, possibly causing damage.

9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords.

10 When disconnecting the power cord from the wall

outlet, grasp the plug; do not pull the cord.

11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this

might damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth.

12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used.

Using this unit with a higher voltage than

specified is dangerous and may cause fire,

damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.

YAMAHA will not be held responsible for any

damage resulting from use of this unit with a

voltage other than specified.

13 To prevent damage by lightning, disconnect the

power cord from the wall outlet during an

electrical storm.

14 Take care of this unit so that no foreign objects

and/or liquid drops inside this unit.

CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT.

15 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact

qualified YAMAHA service personnel when any

service is needed. The cabinet should never be

opened for any reasons.

16 When not planning to use this unit for long

periods of time (i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC

power plug from the wall outlet.

17 Be sure to read the “TROUBLESHOOTING” section

on common operating errors before concluding

that this unit is faulty.

18 Before moving this unit, press STANDBY/ON to set

this unit in the standby mode, and disconnect the

AC power plug from the wall outlet.

This unit is not disconnected from the AC power

source as long as it is connected to the wall outlet,

even if this unit itself is turned off. This state is called

the standby mode. In this state, this unit is designed to

consume a very small quantity of power.

■ For U.K. customers

If the socket outlets in the home are not suitable for the

plug supplied with this appliance, it should be cut off and

an appropriate 3 pin plug fitted. For details, refer to the

instructions described below.

Note

• The plug severed from the mains lead must be destroyed, as a

plug with bared flexible cord is hazardous if engaged in a live

socket outlet.

■ Special Instructions for U.K.

Model

IMPORTANT

THE WIRES IN MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED

IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING

CODE:

Blue: NEUTRAL

Brown: LIVE

As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this

apparatus may not correspond with the coloured

markings identifying the terminals in your plug,

proceed as follows:

The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected

to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or

coloured BLACK. The wire which is coloured

BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is

marked with the letter L or coloured RED.

Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth

terminal of the three pin plug.

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

CONTENTS

INTRODUCTION

CONTENTS ....................................................... 1

FEATURES ........................................................ 2

GETTING STARTED ....................................... 3

Checking the Package Contents ............................... 3

Installing Batteries in the Remote Control ............... 3

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS .................... 4

Front Panel ............................................................... 4

Remote Control ........................................................ 6

Using the Remote Control ........................................ 7

Front Panel Display .................................................. 8

Rear Panel ................................................................ 9

PREPARATION

SPEAKER SETUP .......................................... 10

Speakers to Be Used ............................................... 10

Speaker Placement ................................................. 10

Connecting the Speakers ........................................ 11

CONNECTIONS ............................................. 14

Before Connecting Components ............................ 14

Connecting Video Components .............................. 14

Connecting Audio Components ............................. 16

Connecting to an External Amplifier ..................... 18

Connecting an External Decoder ............................ 18

Connecting the Power Supply Cords ...................... 19

Turning on the Power ............................................. 19

ON-SCREEN DISPLAY (OSD) ..................... 20

OSD Modes ............................................................ 20

Selecting the OSD Mode ........................................ 20

SPEAKER MODE SETTINGS ..................... 21

Summary of SPEAKER SET Items 1A through 1F ...

ADJUSTING THE SPEAKER OUTPUT

LEVELS ....................................................... 22

Before You Begin ................................................... 22

Using the Test Tone (TEST DOLBY SUR.) .......... 22

BASIC OPERATION

BASIC PLAYBACK ........................................ 24

Input Modes and Indications .................................. 26

Selecting a Sound Field Program ........................... 27

Selecting PRO LOGIC or Neo: 6 ....................... 28

DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PROCESSING

(DSP) ............................................................ 30

Understanding Sound Fields .................................. 30

Hi-Fi DSP Programs............................................... 30

CINEMA-DSP ................................................. 32

Sound Design of CINEMA-DSP ............................ 32

CINEMA-DSP Programs ....................................... 34

BASIC RECORDING ..................................... 36

ADVANCED OPERATION

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES .............. 37

Control Area ........................................................... 37

Setting the Manufacturer Code .............................. 38

Programming a New Remote Control Function

(Learn Feature) ................................................... 39

Using the Macro Feature ........................................ 40

Changing the Source Name in the Display Window

............................................................................ 42

Clearing Learned Functions, Macros, Renamed

Source Names, and Setup Manufacturer Codes ...

Clearing a Learned Function or Macro .................. 43

Each Component Control Area .............................. 45

SET MENU ...................................................... 50

Adjusting the Items on the SET MENU................. 50

1 SPEAKER SET (speaker mode settings) ........... 51

2 LOW FRQ TEST ............................................... 54

3 L/R BALANCE (balance of the left and right main

speakers)............................................................. 55

4 HP TONE CTRL (headphone tone control) ....... 55

5 CENTER GEQ (center graphic equalizer) ......... 55

6 INPUT RENAME .............................................. 56

7 I/O ASSIGNMENT ............................................ 56

8 INPUT MODE (initial input mode) ................... 57

9 PARAM. INI (parameter initialization) ............. 58

10 LFE LEVEL ..................................................... 58

11 D-RANGE ........................................................ 59

12 SP DELAY TIME ............................................. 59

13 DISPLAY SET .................................................. 60

14 MEMORY GUARD ......................................... 60

ADJUSTING THE LEVEL OF THE EFFECT

SPEAKERS .................................................. 61

SLEEP TIMER ................................................ 62

Setting the Sleep Timer .......................................... 62

Canceling the Sleep Timer ..................................... 62

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM PARAMETER

EDITING ..................................................... 63

What is a sound field? ............................................ 63

Sound Field Program Parameters ........................... 63

Changing Parameter Settings ................................. 64

Resetting a Parameter to the Factory-set Value ...... 64

DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PARAMETER

DESCRIPTIONS ......................................... 65

TROUBLESHOOTING .................................. 69

GLOSSARY ..................................................... 73

SPECIFICATIONS ......................................... 75

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.

“Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks

of Dolby Laboratories.

“DTS”, “DTS-ES Extended Surround” and “Neo: 6” are

trademarks of Digital Theater System, Inc.

FEATURES

Built-in 6-Channel Power Amplifier

◆ Minimum RMS Output Power

(0.02% THD, 20 Hz – 20 kHz, 8Ω)

Main: 120 W + 120 W

Center: 120 W

Rear: 120 W + 120 W

Rear center: 120 W

Multi-Mode Digital Sound Field

Processing

◆ Dolby Pro Logic/Dolby Pro Logic Decoder

◆ Dolby Digital/Dolby Digital Matrix 6.1 Decoder

◆ DTS/DTS ES (Matrix 6.1, Discrete 6.1)/DTS

Neo: 6 Decoder

◆ CINEMA DSP: Combination of YAMAHA DSP

Technology and Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital

or DTS

◆ Virtual CINEMA DSP

◆ SILENT CINEMA DSP

Other Features

◆ 96-kHz/24-bit D/A Converter

◆ “SET MENU” which Provides You with 14 Items

for Optimizing This Unit for Your Audio/Video

System

◆ Test Tone Generator for Easier Speaker Balance

Adjustment

◆ 6-Channel External Decoder Input for Other

Future Formats

◆ BASS EXTENSION for Reinforcing Bass

Response

◆ On Screen Display Function Helpful in

Controlling This Unit

◆ S Video Signal Input/Output Capability

◆ Component Video Input/Output Capability

◆ Optical and Coaxial Digital Audio Signal Jacks

◆ Sleep Timer

◆ Remote Control with Preset Manufacturer Codes

and “Learning” Capability

◆ PROCESSOR DIRECT for no alteration of the

original signal

• y indicates a tip for your operation.

• Some operations can be performed by using either the buttons on the main unit or on the remote control. In cases when the button

names differ between the main unit and the remote control, the button name on the remote control is given in parentheses in this

manual.

English

INTRODUCTION PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERAIONT

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

TRANSMIT

RE-NAME

STANDBY

6CH INPUT

SOUND

SYSTEM

CLEAR LEARN MACRO

OFF ON

MACRO

PHONO

DVD

VCR2/DVR

VCR 1

TITLE

CHAPTER

PAUSESTOPPOWER

REC

HALL 1

6.1/ES

DSP

10KEY

ROCK

CONCERT

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MUTE

VOLUME

STEREO

TV INPUT

TV VOL

PRESET

DISC

PARAMETER

SET MENU

EFFECT

LEVEL

ON SCREEN

TESTSLEEP

TV MUTE

CONCERT

VIDEO

THEATER

ENTER-

TAINMENT

HALL 2

CHURCH

JAZZ CLUB

SELECT

/DTS

SUR.

CHP/INDEX

A/B/C/D/E

SELECT

DISPLAY

SOURCE

PLAY

–+

ENTER

D-TV/LD

CBL/SAT

CD-R

MD/TAPE

TUNER

V-AU X

POWER

100

11 12

234

1 Open the battery compartment cover.

2 Insert three supplied batteries (LR6) in the

correct direction by aligning the + and –

marks on the batteries with the polarity

markings (+ and –) on the inside of the

battery compartment.

3 After new batteries are correctly inserted,

press the RESET button in the battery

compartment using a ball point pen or

similar object. (This does not clear the

contents of the memory.)

4 Replace the cover as pressing until it snaps

into place.

Connection GuideBatteries (3) (LR6)

Remote control

GETTING STARTED

Checking the Package Contents

Check your package to make sure it has the following items.

Power Cord

(Europe model only)

RESET button

DVD Player

Main Speaker

Subwoofer

Center Speaker Rear Center

Speaker

Rear Speaker

CONNECTION

GUIDE

Analog audio signal

Optical digital signal

S video signal

Video signal

Signal flow

V817920

COMPONENT VIDEO

IMPEDANCE SELECTOR

SET BEFORE POWER ON

FRONT :

REAR :

REAR CENTER :

CENTER

MAIN A OR B

A B :

FRONT :

REAR :

REAR CENTER :

CENTER

MAIN A OR B

PRE OUT/MAIN IN

MAIN OUT

DVD

MONITOR

OUT

DVD

VCR 1

OUT

VCR 2

/DVR

OUT

S VIDEO VIDEO

D-TV

/LD

CBL

/SAT

D-TV

/LD

MAIN IN

REAR (SURROUND)

SUB

WOOFER

CENTER

SPEAKERS

REARCENTER

MAIN

–

REAR

CENTER

RS-232C

(SURROUND)

REAR

CENTER

VIDEO

VIDEOS VIDEO

AUDIO

DIGITAL INPUT

SIGNAL GND

6CH INPUT

CENTER

MAIN

SURROUND

AUDIODIGITAL OUTPUT

MONITOR

OUT

PHONO

CBL

/SAT

D-TV

/LD

DVD

CD-R

MD/

TAPE

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

SUB

WOOFER

OUT (REC)

CD-R

IN (PLAY)

OUT (REC)

MD/TAPE

IN (PLAY)

6ΩMIN. /SPEAKER

4ΩMIN. /SPEAKER

8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER

AUDIO OUT S VIDEO

OUT

VIDEO

OUT

OPTICAL

OUT

COMPONENT

VIDEO OUT

VIDEO IN

VIDEO

OUT

OPTICAL

OUT

Right Left

Installing Batteries in the Remote Control

■ Notes on batteries

• Change all of the batteries if you notice the condition

like; the operating range of the remote control

decreases, the indicator does not flash or its light

becomes dim.

• Do not use old batteries together with new ones.

• Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline

and manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging

carefully as these different types of batteries may have

the same shape and color.

• If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them

immediately. Avoid touching the leaked material or

letting it come into contact with clothing, etc. Clean

the battery compartment thoroughly before installing

new batteries.

If the remote control is without batteries for more than

3 minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the

remote control, the contents of the memory may be

cleared. When the memory is cleared, insert new

batteries, set up the manufacturer code and program

any acquired functions that may have been cleared.

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

Front Panel

1 STANDBY/ON

Turns on and sets this unit in the standby mode. When

you turn on this unit, you will hear a click and there will

be a 4 to 5-second delay before this unit can reproduce

sound.

Standby mode

In this mode, this unit consumes a small amount of

power to receive infrared-signals from the remote

control.

2 Remote control sensor

Receives signals from the remote control.

3 Front panel display

Shows information about the operational status of this

unit (see page 8).

4 INPUT MODE

Sets the priority for the types of input signals (AUTO,

DTS, ANALOG) to receive when one component is

connected to two or more input jacks of this unit (see

page 26). Priority cannot be set when 6CH INPUT is

selected as the input source.

5 INPUT l / h

Selects the input source you want to listen to or watch.

6 VOLUME

Controls the output level of all audio channels.

This does not affect the REC OUT level.

7 PHONES jack

Outputs audio signals for private listening with

headphones. When you connect headphones, no signals

are output to the PRE OUT jacks or to the speakers.

8 BASS EXTENSION

Turns on or off the BASS EXTENSION function at each

time the button is pressed, this feature boosts the bass

frequency of the left and right main channels by +6 dB

(60 Hz) while maintaining overall tonal balance. This

boost is useful if you do not use a subwoofer.

However, this boost may not be noticeable if “1B MAIN

SP” on the SET MENU is set to SMALL and “1E LFE/

BASS OUT” is set to SWFR.

9 PROCESSOR DIRECT

Turns on or off the PROCESSOR DIRECT function at

each time the button is pressed. When this is on, BASS,

TREBLE, and BASS EXTENSION are bypassed,

eliminating any alteration of the original signal.

0 SPEAKERS A/B

Turn on or off the set of main speakers connected to the A

and/or B terminals on the rear panel at each time its

corresponding button is pressed.

BASS

SPEAKERS

BASS

EXTENSION

PROCESSOR

DIRECT

VOLUME

INPUT

INPUT MODE

VIDEO AUX

SILENT

PHONES

S VIDEO VIDEO AUDIOLR

6CH

INPUT

OPTICAL

STANDBY

NATURAL SOUND AMPLIFIER

TREBLE

– +

DIGITAL

EFFECT

– +

PROGRAM

STEREO

SET MENU

–

REC OUT

V-AU X

VCR2

/DVR

VCR1

PHONO

TUNER

MD/TAPE

DVD

SOURCE

D-TV/LD

CBL/SAT

CD-R

y u

English

INTRODUCTION PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERAIONT

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

AL SO

D A

V AM

IFIER

MAHA

To open, press gently on the lower part of the panel.

q BASS

Adjusts the low-frequency response for the left and right

main channels.

Turn the control to the right to increase or to the left to

decrease the low-frequency response.

w TREBLE

Adjusts the high-frequency response for the left and right

main channels.

Turn the control to the right to increase or to the left to

decrease the high-frequency response.

Note

• If you increase or decrease the high-frequency or the low-

frequency sound to an extreme level, the tonal quality from the

center and rear speakers may not match that of the left and

right main speakers.

e REC OUT

Selects the source you want to direct to the audio/video

recorder.

r STEREO/EFFECT

Switches the normal stereo or DSP effect reproduction.

When STEREO is selected, 2-channel input signals are

directed to the main left and right speakers without effect

sounds. All Dolby Digital and DTS audio signals except

for the LFE channel are mixed down to the main left and

right speakers.

t PROGRAM l / h

Selects the DSP program.

y 6CH INPUT

Selects the source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks.

The source selected by pressing 6CH INPUT takes

priority over the source selected with INPUT l / h (or

the input selector buttons on the remote control).

u NEXT — SET MENU –/+

Changes the SET MENU settings.

i VIDEO AUX jacks

Input audio and video signals from a portable external

source such as a game console. To reproduce source

signals from these jacks, select V-AUX as the input

source.

■ Opening and closing the front

panel door

When you are not operating the controls behind the front

panel door, close the door.

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

TRANSMIT

RE-NAME

STANDBY

6CH INPUT

SOUND

SYSTEM

CLEAR LEARN MACRO

OFF ON

MACRO

PHONO

DVD

VCR2/DVR

VCR 1

TITLE

CHAPTER

PAUSESTOPPOWER

REC

HALL 1

6.1/ES

DSP

10KEY

ROCK

CONCERT

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MUTE

VOLUME

STEREO

TV INPUT

TV VOL

PRESET

DISC

PARAMETER

SET MENU

EFFECT

LEVEL

ON SCREEN

TESTSLEEP

TV MUTE

CONCERT

VIDEO

THEATER

ENTER-

TAINMENT

HALL 2

CHURCH

JAZZ CLUB

SELECT

/DTS

SUR.

CHP/INDEX

A/B/C/D/E

SELECT

DISPLAY

SOURCE

PLAY

– +

ENTER

D-TV/LD

CBL/SAT

CD-R

MD/TAPE

TUNER

V-AUX

POWER

100

11 12

234

Remote Control

This section describes the controls and their functions of

the remote control. See “REMOTE CONTROL

FEATURES” on pages 37 to 49 for operating other

components with this remote control.

1 Infrared window

Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the

component you want to operate.

2 RE-NAME

Used for changing the input source name in the display

window (see page 42).

3 TRANSMIT indicator

Flashes while the remote control is sending signals.

4 STANDBY

Sets this unit in the standby mode.

5 SYSTEM POWER

Turns on the power of this unit.

6 Display window

Shows the selected source component that you are

controlling.

7 SOURCE SELECT k/n

Selects the another component to control independently

from the input that has been selected by pressing an input

selector button.

8 LIGHT

Turns the light on or off. When you press this button

once, the light turns on for about ten seconds. Press again

to turn off the light.

9 10KEY/DSP

Selects the numeric button (10KEY) mode or DSP mode.

0 Operation buttons

Provides functions such as play, stop, skip, etc. for

operating your other components selected by the input

selector buttons.

q 6.1/ES

Turns on or off the Dolby Digital Matrix 6.1 or DTS ES

decoder with 10KEY/DSP set to the DSP position.

w LEVEL

Selects the effect speaker channel to be adjusted and sets

the level.

e ON SCREEN

Selects the on-screen display (OSD) mode for your video

monitor.

r SLEEP

Sets the sleep timer.

t TEST

Outputs the test tone to adjust the speaker levels.

y CLEAR

Used for clearing functions acquired when using the learn

and rename features, programmed macros, and set

manufacturer codes (see pages 42 to 44).

u LEARN

Used for setting up the manufacturer code or for

programming the functions of other remote controls (see

pages 38 and 39).

English

INTRODUCTION PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERAIONT

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

BASS

SPEAKERS

BASS

EXTENSION

PROCESSOR

DIRECT

VOLUME

INPUT

INPUT MODE

VIDEO AUX

SILENT

SET MENU

PHONES

S VIDEO VIDEO AUDIOLR

6CH

INPUT

OPTICAL

STANDBY

NATURAL SOUND AMPLIFIER

TREBLE REC OUT

– +

DIGITAL

V-AUX

VCR2

/DVR

VCR1

PHONO

EFFECT

TUNER

MD/TAPE

DVD

SOURCE

D-TV/LD

CBL/SAT

CD-R

– +

PROGRAM

STEREO

–

30°30°

Approximately 6 m (20 feet)

i MACRO

Used to program a series of operations for control by a

single button (see pages 40 to 42).

o MACRO ON/OFF

Turns the macro function on and off.

p Å and ı

Switch the control area for the extra components that are

not connected to this unit without changing the input.

a Input selector buttons

Select the input source and change the control area.

s 6CH INPUT

Selects the source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks.

d DSP program/Numeric buttons

Select DSP programs or numbers according to the

position of 10KEY/DSP.

f MUTE

Mutes the sound. The MUTE indicator turns on when the

MUTE function is on. Press again to restore the audio

output to the previous volume level.

g VOLUME +/–

Increases or decreases the volume level.

h STEREO/EFFECT

Switches the normal stereo or DSP effect reproduction.

When STEREO is selected, 2-channel input signals are

directed to the main left and right speakers without effect

sounds. All Dolby Digital and DTS audio signals except

for the LFE channel are also directed to the main left and

right speakers.

j PARAMETER/SET MENU

Selects the PARAMETER mode or SET MENU mode.

k Cursor buttons k/n/–/+

Select and adjust DSP program parameters and SET

MENU items according to the position of PARAMETER/

SET MENU.

Using the Remote Control

The remote control transmits a directional infrared beam.

Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote

control sensor on the main unit during operation.

■ Handling the remote control

• Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote

control.

• Do not drop the remote control.

• Do not leave or store the remote control in the

following types of conditions:

– high humidity or temperature such as near a heater,

stove or bath;

– dusty places; or

– in places subject to extremely low temperatures.

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

LCR

RC RR

LFE

VIRTUAL

DTS

Neo

MOVIE THEATER

ENTERTAINMENT12

DOLBY DIGITAL

PRO

LOGIC

VCR DVD TUNER CD

PHONO

CD RV AUX

DSP

DISCRETE

PCM

SILENT

DIGITAL

VCR2/DVR

CBL

SAT

TAPE

P. DIRECT

BASS

MUTE VOLUME

SLEEP

6.1

PRO LOGIC

67 0 q wer

12 345

1 Processor indicators

When any function of

DSP

, DTS, DISCRETE,

VIRTUAL, g,

6.1

, and

PRO LOGIC

activated, its indicator lights up.

2 Input source indicator

Shows the current input source with a cursor.

3 SLEEP indicator

Lights up while the sleep timer is on.

4 MUTE indicator

Flashes up while the MUTE function is on.

5 VOLUME level indicator

Indicates the volume level.

6 v indicator

Lights up when this unit is reproducing PCM (pulse code

modulation) digital audio signals.

7 Headphones indicator

Lights up when headphones are connected.

8 SP A B indicators

Lights up according to which set of main speakers is

selected. Both indicators light up when both sets of

speakers are selected.

9 SILENT indicator

Lights up when headphones are connected with the sound

effect (see “SILENT CINEMA DSP” on page 29).

0 DSP program indicators

The name of the selected DSP program lights up when

the ENTERTAINMENT, MOVIE THEATER 1, MOVIE

THEATER 2 or V/DTS SURROUND DSP program is

selected.

q Multi-information display

Shows the current DSP program name and other

information when adjusting or changing settings.

w BASS indicator

Lights up while BASS EXTENSION is on.

e P. DIRECT

Lights up while PROCESSOR DIRECT is on.

r Input channel indicator

Indicates the channel components of input signals being

received.

Front Panel Display

English

INTRODUCTION PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERAIONT

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

IMPEDANCE SELECTOR

SET BEFORE POWER ON

REAR :

REAR CENTER :

CENTER

MAIN A OR B

A B :

REAR :

REAR CENTER :

CENTER

MAIN A OR B

A B :

AC OUTLETS

RS-232C

6ΩMIN. /SPEAKER

4ΩMIN. /SPEAKER

8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER

16ΩMIN. /SPEAKER

SWITCHED 100W MAX. TOTAL

COMPONENT VIDEO

PRE OUT/MAIN IN

MAIN OUT

DVD

MONITOR

OUT

DVD

VCR 1

OUT

VCR 2

/DVR

OUT

TUNER

S VIDEO VIDEO

D-TV

/LD

CBL

/SAT

D-TV

/LD

MAIN IN

REAR (SURROUND)

SUB

WOOFER

CENTER

SPEAKERS

REARCENTER

MAIN

–

REAR

CENTER

(SURROUND)

REAR

CENTER

VIDEO

VIDEOS VIDEO

AUDIO

DIGITAL INPUT

GND

6CH INPUT

CENTER

MAIN

SURROUND

AUDIODIGITAL OUTPUT

MONITOR

OUT

PHONO

CBL

/SAT

D-TV

/LD

DVD

CD-R

MD/

TAP E

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

SUB

WOOFER

OUT (REC)

CD-R

IN (PLAY)

OUT (REC)

MD/TAPE

IN (PLAY)

12 3 4 5 6

782 9 0q

(Europe model)

1 DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks

2 Audio component jacks

See pages 16 and 17 for connection information.

3 Video component jacks

See pages 14 and 15 for connection information.

4 PRE OUT/MAIN IN jacks

See page 18 for connection information.

5 RS232C terminal

This is a control expansion terminal for commercial use.

Consult your dealer for details.

6 AC INLET (Europe model only)

Use this inlet to plug in the supplied power cord.

7 DIGITAL INPUT jacks

8 6CH INPUT jacks

See page 18 for connection information.

9 Speaker terminals

See pages 11 and 12 for connection information.

0 IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch

Use this switch to match the amplifier output to your

speaker impedance (see page 13). Set this unit in the

standby mode before you change the setting of this

switch.

q AC OUTLETS

Use these outlets to supply power to your other A/V

components (see page 19).

Rear Panel

SPEAKER SETUP

Speakers to Be Used

This unit has been designed to provide the best sound-

field quality with a 6-speaker system, using left and right

main speakers, left and right rear speakers, and a center

and rear center speakers. If you use different brands of

speakers (with different tonal qualities) in your system,

the tone of a moving human voice and other types of

sound may not shift smoothly. We recommend that you

use speakers from the same manufacturer or speakers

with the same tonal quality.

The main speakers are used for the main source sound

plus the effect sounds. They will probably be the speakers

from your present stereo system. The rear speakers are

used for the effect and surround sounds, and the center

speaker is for the center sounds (dialog, vocals, etc.).

The main speakers should be high-performance models

and have enough power-handling capacity to accept the

maximum output of your audio system. The other

speakers do not have to be equal to the main speakers. For

precise sound localization, however, it is ideal to use the

models of equivalent performance with the main

speakers.

■ Use of a subwoofer expands your

sound field

It is also possible to further expand your system with the

addition of a subwoofer. The use of a subwoofer is

effective not only for reinforcing bass frequencies from

any or all channels, but also for reproducing the LFE

(low-frequency effect) channel with high fidelity when

the Dolby Digital signal or the DTS signal is played back.

The YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer

System is ideal for natural and lively bass reproduction.

PREPARATION

Speaker Placement

Refer to the following diagram when you place the

speakers.

■ Main speakers

Place the left and right main speakers an equal distance

from the ideal listening position. The distance of each

speaker from each side of the video monitor should be the

same.

■ Center speaker

Align the front face of the center speaker with the front

face of your video monitor. Place the speaker as close to

the monitor as possible, such as directly over or under the

monitor and centrally between the main speakers.

Note

• If the center speaker is not used, the center channel sound will

be heard from the left and right main speakers. In this case,

“1A CENTER SP” on the SET MENU is set to NONE (see

page 51 for details).

■ Rear speakers

Place these speakers behind your listening position,

facing slightly inwards, nearly 1.8 m (6 feet) above the

floor.

■ Rear center speaker

Place the rear center speaker in the center between the left

and right rear speakers at the same height from the floor

as the rear speakers.

■ Subwoofer

The position of the subwoofer is not so critical, because

low bass sounds are not highly directional. But it is better

to place the subwoofer near the main speakers. Turn it

slightly toward the center of the room to reduce the wall

reflections.

CAUTION

Use magnetically shielded speakers. If this type of

speakers still creates the interference with a monitor,

place the speakers away from the monitor.

Main

speaker (L)

1.8 m (6 feet)

Rear speaker (L)

Rear center

speaker

Rear speaker (R)

Subwoofer

Main speaker (R)Center speaker

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

SPEAKER SETUP

Connecting the Speakers

Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. If the connections are

faulty, no sound will be heard from the speakers, and if the polarity of the speaker connections is incorrect, the sound

will be unnatural and lack bass.

CAUTION

• Use speakers with the specified impedance shown on the rear panel of this unit.

• Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other and do not let them touch any metal part of this unit. This could

damage this unit and/or speakers.

If necessary, use the SET MENU to change the speaker mode settings according to the number and size of the speakers

in your configuration after you finish connecting your speakers.

■ Speaker cables

A speaker cord is actually a pair of insulated cables

running side by side. One of the cables is colored or

shaped differently, perhaps with a stripe, groove or ridge.

1 Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8”) of

insulation from each of the speaker cables.

2 Twist the exposed wires of the cable

together to prevent short circuits.

■ Connecting to the SPEAKERS terminals

1 Unscrew the knob.

2 Insert one bare wire into the hole in the side

of each terminal.

3 Tighten the knob to secure the wire.

10 mm (3/8”)

■ MAIN SPEAKERS terminals

One or two speaker systems can be connected to these terminals. If you use only one speaker system, connect it to either

of the MAIN A or B terminals.

■ REAR SPEAKERS terminals

A rear speaker system can be connected to these terminals.

■ CENTER SPEAKER terminals

A center speaker can be connected to these terminals.

■ REAR CENTER SPEAKER terminals

A rear center speaker can be connected to these terminals.

Red: positive (+)

Black: negative (–)

SPEAKER SETUP

IMPEDANCE SELECTOR

SET BEFORE POWER ON

REAR :

REAR CENTER :

CENTER

MAIN A OR B

A B :

REAR :

REAR CENTER :

CENTER

MAIN A OR B

A B :

AC OUTLETS

RS-232C

6ΩMIN. /SPEAKER

4ΩMIN. /SPEAKER

8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER

16ΩMIN. /SPEAKER

SWITCHED 100W MAX. TOTAL

COMPONENT VIDEO

PRE OUT/MAIN IN

MAIN OUT

DVD

MONITOR

OUT

DVD

VCR 1

OUT

VCR 2

/DVR

OUT

S VIDEO VIDEO

D-TV

/LD

CBL

/SAT

D-TV

/LD

MAIN IN

REAR (SURROUND)

SUB

WOOFER

CENTER

SPEAKERS

REARCENTER

MAIN

–

REAR

CENTER

(SURROUND)

REAR

CENTER

VIDEO

VIDEOS VIDEO

AUDIO

DIGITAL INPUT

GND

6CH INPUT

CENTER

MAIN

SURROUND

AUDIODIGITAL OUTPUT

MONITOR

OUT

PHONO

CBL

/SAT

D-TV

/LD

DVD

CD-R

MD/

TAP E

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

SUB

WOOFER

OUT (REC)

CD-R

IN (PLAY)

OUT (REC)

MD/TAPE

IN (PLAY)

TUNER

45 6 7

Subwoofer

system

Rear Center

speaker

Main B speaker

Center

speaker

(Europe model)

Right

Rear speaker

Right Left

Main A speaker

Right Left

Left

The diagram above shows the speaker layout in the listening room.

■ SUBWOOFER jack

When using a subwoofer with built-in amplifier, including the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System,

connect the input jack of the subwoofer system to this jack. Low bass signals distributed from the main, center and/or

rear channels are directed to this jack if they are assigned to this jack. (The cut-off frequency of this jack is 90 Hz.) The

LFE (low-frequency effect) signals generated when Dolby Digital or DTS is decoded are also directed if they are

assigned to this jack.

Notes

• Adjust the volume level of the subwoofer with the control on the subwoofer. It is also possible to adjust the volume level by using the

remote control of this unit (see ADJUSTING THE LEVEL OF THE EFFECT SPEAKERS on page 61).

• Depending on the settings of “1 SPEAKER SET” and “10 LFE LEVEL” on the SET MENU, some signals may not be output from

the SUBWOOFER jack.

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

SPEAKER SETUP

AC OUTLETS

6ΩMIN. /SPEAKER

4ΩMIN. /SPEAKER

8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER

16ΩMIN. /SPEAKER

SWITCHED 100W MAX. TOTAL

SET BEFORE POWER ON

REAR :

REAR CENTER :

CENTER

MAIN A OR B

A B :

REAR :

REAR CENTER :

CENTER

MAIN A OR B

A B :

IMPEDANCE SELECTOR

SET BEFORE POWER ON

REAR :

REAR CENTER :

CENTER

MAIN A OR B

A B :

REAR :

REAR CENTER :

CENTER

MAIN A OR B

A B :

6ΩMIN. /SPEAKER

4ΩMIN. /SPEAKER

8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER

16ΩMIN. /SPEAKER

IMPEDANCE SELECTOR

Switch

position

Upper

Lower

Speaker

Main

Center

Rear

Center

Rear

Main

Center

Rear

Center

Rear

Impedance level

If you use one set of main speakers, the impedance of

each speaker must be 4 Ω or higher.

If you use two sets of main speakers, the impedance of

each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher.

The impedance must be 4 Ω or higher.

The impedance must be 6 Ω or higher.

The impedance of each speaker must be 6 Ω or higher.

If you use one set of main speakers, the impedance of

each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher.

If you use two sets of main speakers, the impedance of

each speaker must be 16 Ω or higher.

The impedance must be 8 Ω or higher.

The impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher.

IMPEDANCE

SELECTOR

switch

(Europe model)

■ IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch

WARNING

Do not change the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch setting while the power of this unit is on, otherwise this unit

may be damaged.

If this unit fails to turn on when STANDBY/ON (or SYSTEM POWER) is pressed, the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR

switch may not be fully slid to either position. If so, slide the switch to either position fully when this unit is in the

standby mode.

Select the left and right position according to the impedance of the speakers in your system. Be sure to move this switch

only when this unit is in the standby mode.

CONNECTIONS

Before Connecting Components

CAUTION

Never connect this unit and other components to mains power until all connections between components have been

completed.

• Be sure all connections are made correctly, that is to say L (left) to L, R (right) to R, “+” to “+” and “–” to “–”. Some

components require different connection methods and have different jack names. Refer to the operation instructions

for each component to be connected to this unit.

• When you connect other YAMAHA audio components (such as a tape deck, MD recorder and CD player or

changer), connect them to the jack with the same number labels as !, #, $ etc. YAMAHA applies this labeling

system to all its products.

• After you have completed all connections, check them again to make sure they are correct.

Connecting Video Components

■ About the video jacks

There are three types of video jacks. Video signals input through the VIDEO jacks are the conventional composite video

signals. Video signals input through the S VIDEO jacks are separated into luminance (Y) and color (C) video signals.

The S-video signals achieve high-quality color reproduction. Video signals input through the COMPONENT VIDEO

jacks are separated into luminance (Y) and color difference (P

, P

) video signals. The jacks are also separated

into three for each signal. The description of the component video jacks may be different depending on the component

(e.g. Y, C

, C

/Y, P

, P

/Y, B-Y, R-Y etc.). Component video signals provide the best quality in picture reproduction.

If your video component has an S-video output or component video output, you can connect it to this unit. Connect the

S-video signal output jack on your video component to the S VIDEO jack or connect the component signal output jacks

on your video component to the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks.

• Each type of video jack works independently. Signals input through the composite

video, S-video and component jacks are output through the corresponding composite

video, S-video, and component jacks, respectively.

• You can designate the input for the COMPONENT VIDEO A and B jacks according

to your component by using “7 I/O ASSIGNMENT” on the SET MENU (see pages

56 and 57 for details).

Notes

• Use a commercially available S-video cable when connecting to the S VIDEO jack, and commercially available video cables when

connecting to the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks.

• When you are using the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks, check the details in the owner’s manual that came with the component being

connected.

■ VIDEO AUX jacks (on the front panel)

These jacks are used to connect any video input source

such as a game console and a video camera to this unit.

S VIDEO VIDEO

L AUDIO R OPTICAL

VIDEO AUX

AUDIO OUT R

AUDIO OUT L

VIDEO OUT

OPTICAL OUT

S VIDEO OUT

Game console or video camera

COMPONENT VIDEO

S VIDEO VIDEO

/ C

VIDEO jack

(composite)

COMPONENT

VIDEO jacks

S VIDEO

jack

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

CONNECTIONS

DIGITAL INPUT

GND

6CH INPUT

CENTER

MAIN

SURROUND

AUDIODIGITAL OUTPUT

PHONO

CD-R

MD/

TAPE

OPTICAL

SUB

WOOFER

OUT (REC)

CD-R

IN (PLAY)

OUT (REC)

MD/TAPE

IN (PLAY)

D-TV

/LD

DVD

COAXIAL

CBL

/SAT

VIDEO

MONITOR

OUT

S VIDEO

DVD

VCR 1

OUT

VCR 2

/DVR

OUT

D-TV

/LD

CBL

/SAT

VIDEOS VIDEO

VIDEOAUDIO COMPONENT VIDEO

DVD

MONITOR

OUT

D-TV

/LD

TUNER

S VIDEO

OUTPUT

S VIDEO

OUTPUT

S VIDEO

OUTPUT

S VIDEO

INPUT

VIDEO

INPUT

S VIDEO

OUTPUT

AUDIO

OUTPUT

AUDIO

OUTPUT

AUDIO INPUT

AUDIO OUTPUT

COAXIAL

OUTPUT

OPTICAL

OUTPUT

OPTICAL

OUTPUT

VIDEO

OUTPUT

AUDIO

OUTPUT

VIDEO

OUTPUT

INPUT

VIDEO

OUTPUT

VIDEO

INPUT

COMPONENT

INPUT

COMPONENT

OUTPUT

COMPONENT

OUTPUT

S VIDEO

INPUT

VIDEO

OUTPUT

S S

(Europe model)

LD player

demodulator

*1 If your LD player has an RF

OUTPUT jack, first connect it to

the RF INPUT on an RF

demodulator and then connect

the RF OUTPUT on an RF

demodulator to the COAXIAL

jack on this unit.

indicates S-video cables

indicates video cables

indicates coaxial cables

indicates optical cables

indicates right analog cables

indicates left analog cables

indicates signal direction

Video monitor

VCR 1 or VCR 2/

DVR (digital

video recorder)

Cable TV or

Satellite tuner

DVD player

TV/digital TV or

LD player

CONNECTIONS

Connecting Audio Components

■ Connecting to digital jacks

This unit has digital jacks for direct transmission of

digital signals through either coaxial or fiber optic cables.

You can use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital

and DTS bitstreams. When you connect components to

both the COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, priority is given

to the input signals from the COAXIAL jack. All digital

input jacks are acceptable for 96-kHz sampling digital

signals.

• You can designate the input for each digital jacks according to

your component by using “7 I/O ASSIGNMENT” on the SET

MENU (see pages 56 and 57 for details).

Note

• The OPTICAL jacks on this unit conform to the EIA standard.

If you use a fiber optic cable that does not conform to this

standard, this unit may not function properly.

■ Connecting a turntable

PHONO jacks are for connecting a turntable with an MM

or high-output MC cartridge. If you have a turntable with

a low-output MC cartridge, use an in-line boosting

transformer or MC-head amplifier when connecting to

these jacks.

• Connect your turntable to the GND terminal to reduce noise in

the signal. However you may hear less noise without the

connection to the GND terminal for some record players.

■ Connecting a CD player

• The COAXIAL CD and OPTICAL CD jacks are available for a

CD player which has coaxial or optical digital output jacks.

• When you connect a CD player to both the COAXIAL CD and

OPTICAL CD jacks, priority is given to the input signals from

the COAXIAL CD jack.

■ Connecting an MD recorder, tape

deck or CD recorder

• DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks and analog OUT (REC) are

independent. Only digital signals are output from DIGITAL

OUTPUT jacks and analog signals from OUT (REC) jacks.

• When you connect your recording component to both the

analog and digital input and output jacks, the priority is given

to the digital signal.

Notes

• When you connect a recording component to this unit, keep its

power on while using this unit. If the power is off, this unit may

distort the sound from other components.

• When you record from a source component connected to this

unit while this unit is set in the standby mode, the recorded

sound may be distorted. To avoid this problem, turn on this

unit.

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

CONNECTIONS

DIGITAL INPUT

D-TV

/LD

DVD

COAXIAL

CBL

/SAT

VIDEO

MONITOR

OUT

S VIDEO

DVD

VCR 1

OUT

VCR 2

/DVR

OUT

D-TV

/LD

CBL

/SAT

VIDEOS VIDEO

VIDEOAUDIO COMPONENT VIDEO

DVD

MONITOR

OUT

D-TV

/LD

MD/

TAPE

CD-R

OPTICAL

CENTER

MAIN

SURROUND

SUB

WOOFER

PHONO

OUT (REC)

CD-R

IN (PLAY)

OUT (REC)

MD/TAPE

IN (PLAY)

AUDIO

6CH INPUT

GND

CD-R

TUNER

OUTPUT

GND

L R

INPUT OUTPUT INPUTOUTPUT

OUTPUT

COAXIAL

OUTPUT

OPTICAL

OUTPUT

OPTICAL

INPUT

OPTICAL

INPUT

OPTICAL

OUTPUT

SUBWOOFER

OUTPUT

CENTER

OUTPUT

MAIN

OUTPUT

SURROUND

OUTPUT

L R

DIGITAL OUTPUT

(Europe model)

indicates coaxial cables

indicates optical cables

indicates right analog cables

indicates left analog cables

indicates signal direction

External decoder

See page 18

Turntable

CD player

CD recorder

MD recorder or

tape deck

CONNECTIONS

Connecting to an External

Amplifier

If you want to increase the power output to the speakers,

or want to use another amplifier, connect an external

amplifier to the PRE OUT/MAIN IN jacks as follows.

Note

• When RCA pin plugs are connected to the PRE OUT/MAIN

IN jacks for output to an external amplifier, it is not necessary

to use the corresponding SPEAKERS terminals.

1 MAIN OUT/IN jacks

MAIN OUT jacks .... Main channel line output jacks.

The signals output through these

jacks are affected by VOLUME,

BASS, TREBLE, and BASS

EXTENSION settings.

MAIN IN jacks ........ Line input to this unit’s Main

channel amplifiers.

When connecting to these jacks, signals input to the

preamplifier of this unit will not be output from the main

amplifier of this unit.

2 REAR CENTER jack

Rear center channel line output jack.

3 CENTER jack

Center channel line output jack.

4 SUBWOOFER jack

When using a subwoofer with built-in amplifier, including

the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer

System, connect the input jack of the subwoofer system

to this jack. Low bass signals distributed from the main,

center and/or rear channels are directed to this jack if they

are assigned to this jack. (The cut-off frequency of this

jack is 90 Hz.) The LFE (low-frequency effect) signals

generated when Dolby Digital or DTS is decoded are also

directed if they are assigned to this jack.

Notes

• Adjust the volume level of the subwoofer with the control on

the subwoofer. It is also possible to adjust the volume level by

using the remote control of this unit (see ADJUSTING THE

LEVEL OF THE EFFECT SPEAKERS on page 61).

• Depending on the settings of “1 SPEAKER SET” and “10 LFE

LEVEL” on the SET MENU, some signals may not be output

from the SUBWOOFER jack.

5 REAR (SURROUND) jacks

Rear channel line output jacks.

PRE OUT/MAIN IN

MAIN OUT MAIN IN

REAR (SURROUND)

SUB

WOOFER

CENTER

REAR

CENTER

1 2

3 45

Connecting an External Decoder

This unit is equipped with 6 additional input jacks (left

and right MAIN, CENTER, left and right SURROUND

and SUBWOOFER) for discrete multi-channel input from

an external decoder, sound processor or pre-amplifier.

Connect the output jacks on your external decoder to the

6CH INPUT jacks. Be sure to match the left and right

outputs to the left and right input jacks for the main and

surround channels.

Notes

• When you select 6CH INPUT as the input source, this unit

automatically turns off the digital sound field processor, and

you cannot listen to DSP programs.

• When you select 6CH INPUT as the input source, settings of

“1 SPEAKER SET” on the SET MENU do not apply (except

for 1F MAIN LEVEL).

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERAIONT

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

CONNECTIONS

Connecting the Power Supply

Cords

(Europe model)

IMPEDANCE SELECTOR

SET BEFORE POWER ON

REAR :

REAR CENTER :

CENTER

MAIN A OR B

A B :

REAR :

REAR CENTER :

CENTER

MAIN A OR B

A B :

6ΩMIN. /SPEAKER

4ΩMIN. /SPEAKER

8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER

16ΩMIN. /SPEAKER

SWITCHED 100W MAX. TOTAL

AC OUTLETS

■ Connecting the AC power cord

[Europe model]

Plug the power cord into the AC inlet when all

connections are complete, and then plug in this unit to the

wall outlet.

Caution

• Do not use other AC power cords than the one provided.

Otherwise it may result in causing fire or an electrical shock.

[U.K. model]

Plug in this unit to the wall outlet.

■ AC OUTLETS (SWITCHED)

Europe model ............................................... 3 OUTLETS

U.K. model ..................................................... 1 OUTLET

Use these outlets to connect the power cords from your

components to this unit. The power to the AC OUTLETS

is controlled by this unit’s STANDBY/ON (or SYSTEM

POWER and STANDBY). These outlets will supply

power to any connected component whenever this unit is

turned on. The maximum power (total power

consumption of components) that can be connected to the

AC OUTLETS is 100 W.

Turning on the Power

When all connections are completed, turn on the power of

this unit.

1 Press STANDBY/ON (SYSTEM POWER on

the remote control) to turn on the power of

this unit.

The level of the main volume, and then the current

DSP program name appear on the front panel

display.

2 Turn on the video monitor connected to this

unit.

BASS

SPEAKERS

BASS

EXTENSION

PROCESSOR

DIRECT

VOLUME

INPUT

INPUT MODE

VIDEO AUX

SILENT

PHONES

S VIDEO VIDEO AUDIOLR

6CH

INPUT

OPTICAL

NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER

TREBLE

– +

DIGITAL

EFFECT

– +

PROGRAM

STEREO

SET MENU

–

REC OUT

V-AUX

VCR2

/DVR

VCR1

PHONO

TUNER

MD/TAPE

DVD

SOURCE

D-TV/LD

CBL/SAT

CD-R

STANDBY

TRANSMIT

RE-NAME

STANDBY

6CH INPUT

SOUND

SYSTEM

CLEAR LEARN MACRO

OFF ON

MACRO

PHONO

DVD

VCR2/DVR

VCR 1

TITLE

CHAPTER

PAUSESTOPPOWER

REC

SELECT

DISPLAY

SOURCE

PLAY

– +

ENTER

D-TV/LD

CBL/SAT

CD-R

MD/TAPE

TUNER

V-AU X

POWER

STANDBY

/ON

SYSTEM

POWER

Remote control

Front panel

To AC outlet

Selecting the OSD Mode

1 Turn on the video monitor connected to this

unit.

2 Press ON SCREEN on the remote control

repeatedly to change the display mode.

The OSD mode changes in the following order: full

display, short display, and display off.

Notes

• If you choose a video input source that has a component

connected to both the S VIDEO IN and composite VIDEO IN

jacks, and both the S VIDEO OUT and composite VIDEO

OUT jacks are connected to a video monitor, the video signal is

output to both the S VIDEO OUT and VIDEO OUT jacks.

However, the OSD is carried only on the S-video signal. If no

video signal is input, the OSD is carried on both the S-video

and composite video signals.

• If your video monitor is connected only to the COMPONENT

VIDEO jacks of this unit, the OSD is not shown. Make sure to

connect your video monitor to the COMPONENT VIDEO

jacks and either VIDEO or S VIDEO jacks if you want to see

the OSD.

• Playing back video software that has an anti-copy signal or

video signals with a lot of noise may produce unstable images.

P01 CONCERT HALL 1

ROOM SIZE…………1.O

LIVENESS…………………5

INIT.DLY…………30ms

≥ Europe Hall A

P01 CONCERT HALL 1

Europe Hall A

PARAMETER

SET MENU

LEVEL

ON SCREEN

TESTSLEEP

ON-SCREEN DISPLAY (OSD)

You can display the operation information for this unit on

a video monitor. If you display the SET MENU and DSP

program parameter settings on a monitor, it is much easier

to see the available options and parameters than it is by

reading this information on the front panel display.

• If a video source is being reproduced, the OSD is

superimposed over the image.

• The OSD signal is not output to the OUT (REC) jack, and will

not be recorded with any video signal.

• You can set the OSD to turn on (blue background) or off when

a video source is not being reproduced (or the source

component is turned off) by using “13 DISPLAY SET” on the

SET MENU (see page 60).

OSD Modes

You can change the amount of information the OSD

shows.

Full display

This mode always shows the DSP program parameter

settings on the video monitor.

Short display

This mode briefly shows the same contents as the front

panel display at the bottom of the screen and then

disappears.

Display off

This mode briefly shows the “DISPLAY OFF” message at

the bottom of the screen and then disappears. Afterwards,

no changes to operations appear on the monitor except

those of the ON SCREEN button.

Full display Short display

• When you choose the full display mode, INPUT l / h,

VOLUME and some other types of operation information are

displayed at the bottom of the screen in the same format as that

for the front panel display.

• The SET MENU and test tone display appear regardless of the

OSD mode.

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERAIONT

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

Item

1A CENTER SP

1B MAIN SP

1C REAR L/R SP

1D REAR CT SP

1E LFE/BASS OUT

1F MAIN LEVEL

Description

Selects the output mode according to whether or not a center speaker is

being used and its performance.

Selects the output mode according to the performance of the main

speakers.

Selects the output mode according to whether or not rear L/R speakers

are being used and their performance.

Selects the output mode according to whether or not a rear center

speaker is being used and its performance.

Selects the speaker according to use for LFE signal output and low bass

signal.

Selects the main speaker level.

Control value (default

setting indicated in bold)

LRG/SML/NONE

LARGE/SMALL

LRG/SML/NONE

SWFR/MAIN/BOTH

Normal/–10 dB

SPEAKER MODE SETTINGS

This unit has 6 SPEAKER SET items on the SET MENU that you must set according to the number of speakers in your

configuration and their size. The following table summarizes these SPEAKER SET items, and shows the initial settings

as well as other possible settings.

Summary of SPEAKER SET Items 1A through 1F

If the initial settings shown in the above table are not appropriate for your speaker configuration,

change settings following the steps described in “1 SPEAKER SET” from page 51 to 54.

4 Set PARAMETER/SET

MENU on the remote

control to PARAMETER.

Using the Test Tone (TEST DOLBY

SUR.)

Use the test tone to balance the output levels of the 6

speakers required for a surround sound system. The

adjustment of each speaker output level should be made at

your listening position with the remote control.

1 Press TEST to output the

test tone.

2 Adjust the volume so you can hear the test

tone.

The test tone is heard from the left main speaker,

center speaker, right main speaker, right rear speaker,

rear center speaker and left rear speaker in order. The

tone is produced for 2.5 seconds each time.

This section explains how to adjust the speaker output

levels by using the test tone generator. When this

adjustment is made, the output level heard at the listening

position will be the same from each speaker. This is

important for the best performance of the digital sound

field processor, and various decoders (Dolby Digital,

Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Pro Logic

, DTS, DTS ES, and

DTS Neo: 6).

Note

• Since this unit cannot enter the test mode while headphones are

connected to this unit, be sure to unplug the headphones from

the PHONES jack when using the test tone.

Before You Begin

1 Turn on the video monitor connected to this

unit.

2 Press SPEAKERS A or B

to select the main

speakers to be used.

If you are using two sets of the

main speakers, press both A

and B.

3 Set the BASS and TREBLE controls on the

front panel to the center position and turn off

BASS EXTENSION and PROCESSOR

DIRECT by pressing the buttons.

“BASS EXT. OFF” and “P. DIRECT OFF” appear

on the front panel display.

TEST

BASS

TREBLE

– +– +

MUTE

VOLUME

STEREO

TV INPUT

TV VOL

PRESET

DISC

PARAMETER

SET MENU

EFFECT

LEVEL

ON SCREEN

TESTSLEEP

TV MUTE

A/B/C/D/E

1, 4

BASS

EXTENSION

PROCESSOR

DIRECT

SPEAKERS

ADJUSTING THE SPEAKER OUTPUT LEVELS

Set to OFF.

BASS

SPEAKERS

BASS

EXTENSION

PROCESSOR

DIRECT

VOLUME

INPUT

INPUT MODE

VIDEO AUX

SILENT

PHONES

S VIDEO VIDEO AUDIOLR

6CH

INPUT

OPTICAL

STANDBY

NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER

TREBLE

– +

DIGITAL

EFFECT

– +

PROGRAM

STEREO

SET MENU

–

REC OUT

V-AUX

VCR2

/DVR

VCR1

PHONO

TUNER

MD/TAPE

DVD

SOURCE

D-TV/LD

CBL/SAT

CD-R

BASS

SPEAKERS

BASS

EXTENSION

PROCESSOR

DIRECT

VOLUME

INPUT

INPUT MODE

VIDEO AUX

SILENT

PHONES

S VIDEO VIDEO AUDIOLR

6CH

INPUT

OPTICAL

STANDBY

NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER

TREBLE

– +

DIGITAL

EFFECT

– +

PROGRAM

STEREO

SET MENU

–

REC OUT

V-AUX

VCR2

/DVR

VCR1

PHONO

TUNER

MD/TAPE

DVD

SOURCE

D-TV/LD

CBL/SAT

CD-R

MUTE

VOLUME

STEREO

TV INPUT

TV VOL

PRESET

DISC

PARAMETER

SET MENU

EFFECT

LEVEL

ON SCREEN

TESTSLEEP

TV MUTE

A/B/C/D/E

PARAMETER

SET MENU

VOLUME

Front panel

Remote control

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERAIONT

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

CONNECTIONSADJUSTING THE SPEAKER OUTPUT LEVELS

Notes

• The tonal quality of the center speaker can be adjusted by using

“5 CENTER GEQ” on the SET MENU (see page 55).

• If “1A CENTER SP” on the SET MENU is set to NONE, the

center channel sound is automatically output from the left and

right main speakers.

• If “1C REAR L/R SP” on the SET MENU is set to NONE, the

output level of the rear right, left and center speakers cannot be

adjusted in step 3. The test tone will be circulated in the order

of LEFT→CENTER→RIGHT→LEFT..., skipping the rear right

and left speakers and the rear center speaker.

• If “1D REAR CT SP” on the SET MENU is set to NONE, the

out level of the rear center speaker cannot be adjusted in step 3.

The test tone will be circulated in the order of

LEFT→CENTER→RIGHT→RIGHT SURROUND→LEFT

SURROUND→LEFT ..., skipping the rear center speaker.

• It is not necessary to readjust the speaker level once it is set as

long as you do not change the speakers. You can enjoy listening

to or watching the input source with the desired volume by

adjusting the volume key.

• You can increase the output levels of the effect speakers

(center, left rear and right rear and rear center) to +10 dB. If the

output level of these speakers is lower than that of the main

speakers even after you have increased the output level of these

speakers up to +10 dB, set “1F MAIN LEVEL” on the SET

MENU to –10 dB (see page 54). This setting decreases the

main speaker output level to about one-third of the normal

level. After you have set “1F MAIN LEVEL” on the SET

MENU to –10 dB, adjust the levels for the center and rear

speakers again.

The state of the test tone output is also shown on the

monitor by an image of the audio listening room.

This is convenient for adjusting each speaker level.

Front panel display also indicates from which

speaker the test tone is output in the order of TEST

LEFT→TEST CENTER→TEST RIGHT→

TEST R SUR.→TEST REAR CNTR→TEST L SUR.

Note

• If the test tone cannot be heard, turn down the volume, set this

unit in the standby mode and check the speaker connections.

3 Press –/+ repeatedly to

adjust the output level of

the effect speakers so that

the output level coming

from each speaker is the

same.

While adjusting, the test tone is heard from the

selected speaker.

• You can stop the sequence temporarily by holding down k / n.

4 When the adjustment is

complete, press TEST to

stop the test tone.

LEFT

TEST DOLBY SUR.

LEFT SURROUND RIGHT SURROUND

CENTER

REAR CENTER

RIGHT

LEFT

TEST

BASIC PLAYBACK

1 Press STANDBY/ON (SYSTEM POWER on

the remote control) to turn on the power.

2 Turn on the video monitor connected to this

unit if you will play video sources.

3 Press SPEAKERS A or B

to select the main

speakers to be used.

If you are using two sets of

main speakers, press both A

and B. The speaker indicator(s)

for the selected set(s) lights up

on the front panel display.

4 Press INPUT l / h repeatedly (one of the

input selector buttons on the remote control)

to select the input source.

• The selected input source name and input mode

appear on the front panel display for a few

seconds.

To select a source connected to the 6CH INPUT

jacks

Press 6CH INPUT until “6CH INPUT” appears on the

front panel display.

Notes

• If “6CH INPUT” is shown on the front panel display, no other

source can be played. To select another input source with

INPUT l / h (one of the input selector buttons), press 6CH

INPUT to turn off “6CH INPUT” from the front panel display.

• If you want to enjoy an audio source connected to the 6CH

INPUT jacks together with a video source, first select the video

source and then press 6CH INPUT.

INPUT

HALL 1

6.1/ES

DSP

10KEY

ROCK

CONCERT

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MUTE

VOLUME

STEREO

TV INPUT

TV VOL

PRESET

DISC

EFFECT

TV MUTE

CONCERT

VIDEO

THEATER

ENTER-

TAINMENT

HALL 2

CHURCH

JAZZ CLUB

SELECT

/DTS

SUR.

CHP/INDEX

A/B/C/D/E

100

11 12

234

TRANSMIT

RE-NAME

STANDBY

6CH INPUT

SOUND

SYSTEM

CLEAR LEARN MACRO

OFF ON

MACRO

PHONO

DVD

VCR2/DVR

VCR 1

TITLE

CHAPTER

PAUSESTOPPOWER

REC

HALL 1

DSP

10KEY

HALL 2

CHURCH

JAZZ CLUB

SELECT

DISPLAY

SOURCE

PLAY

– +

ENTER

D-TV/LD

CBL/SAT

CD-R

MD/TAPE

TUNER

V-AU X

POWER

PHONO

DVD

VCR2/DVR

VCR 1

D-TV/LD

CBL/SAT

CD-R

MD/TAPE

TUNER

V-A UX

VCR DVD TUNER CD

PHONO

CD RV AUX 1

VCR2/DVR

CBL

SAT

TAPE

VOLUME

DVD AUTO

BASS

SPEAKERS

BASS

EXTENSION

PROCESSOR

DIRECT

VOLUME

INPUT

INPUT MODE

VIDEO AUX

SILENT

PHONES

S VIDEO VIDEO AUDIOLR

6CH

INPUT

OPTICAL

NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER

TREBLE

– +

DIGITAL

EFFECT

– +

PROGRAM

STEREO

SET MENU

–

REC OUT

V-AUX

VCR2

/DVR

VCR1

PHONO

TUNER

MD/TAPE

DVD

SOURCE

D-TV/LD

CBL/SAT

CD-R

STANDBY

/ON

SYSTEM

POWER

SPEAKERS

Remote control

Front panel

Selected input source

6CH INPUT

Remote controlFront panel

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

BASIC PLAYBACK

■ BGV (background video) function

The BGV function allows you to combine a video image

from a video source with a sound from an audio source.

For example, you can enjoy listening to classical music

while having beautiful scenery from the video source on

the video monitor.

Select a source from the video group and then select a

source from the audio group with the input selector

buttons on the remote control. This selection for BGV

cannot be made with INPUT l / h on the front panel.

■ To mute the sound

Press MUTE on the

remote control.

To resume the audio output,

press MUTE again.

• You can also cancel mute to press any operation buttons such as

VOLUME +/–.

• During muting, the “MUTE” indicator flashes on the front

panel display.

■ When you have finished using

this unit

Press STANDBY/ON (STANDBY on the

remote control) to set this unit in the

standby mode.

5 Start playback or select a broadcast station

on the source component.

Refer to the operation instructions for the

component.

6 Adjust the volume to the desired output

level.

If desired, use BASS, TREBLE and BASS

EXTENSION. These controls are only effective for

sound from the main speakers.

Note

• If the component connected to the VCR 1 OUT, VCR 2/DVR

OUT, CD-R OUT and MD/TAPE OUT jacks is turned off, the

reproduced sound may be distorted or the volume may be

lowered for the characteristics of AV component. In this case,

turn on the component.

7 Select a DSP program if desired.

Use PROGRAM l / h (DSP program buttons on

the remote control) to select a DSP program. See

pages 30 to 35 for details about the DSP program.

PHONO

DVD

VCR2/DVR

VCR 1

D-TV/LD

CBL/SAT

CD-R

MD/TAPE

TUNER

V-A UX

VOLUME

BASS

TREBLE

– +– +

BASS

EXTENSION

Front panel

Remote control

STANDBY

/ON

STANDBY

Front panel

Remote control

MUTE

PROGRAM

HALL 1

DSP

10KEY

ROCK

CONCERT

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

CONCERT

VIDEO

THEATER

ENTER-

TAINMENT

HALL 2

CHURCH

JAZZ CLUB

SELECT

/DTS

SUR.

100

11 12

234

Front panel Remote control

BASIC PLAYBACK

Input Modes and Indications

This unit comes with various input jacks. You can set the

priority of the input signal among different types of input

signals.

When you turn on the power of this unit, the input mode

is set according to “8 INPUT MODE” on the SET MENU

(see page 57 for details).

Press INPUT MODE (the input selector

button that you have pressed to select the

input source on the remote control)

repeatedly until the desired input mode is

shown on the front panel display.

AUTO: In this mode, the input signal is

automatically selected in the following

order:

1) Dolby Digital or DTS signal

2) Digital (PCM) signal

3) Analog signal

DTS: In this mode, only the digital input signal

encoded with DTS is selected even if

another signal is input at the same time.

ANALOG: In this mode, only the analog input signal is

selected even if a digital signal is input at

the same time.

Notes

• If digital signals are input from both the COAXIAL and

OPTICAL jacks, the digital signal from the COAXIAL jack

has precedence over the OPTICAL jack.

• When AUTO is selected, this unit automatically determines the

type of signal. If this unit detects a Dolby Digital or DTS

signal, the decoder automatically switches to the appropriate

setting.

• In playing the disc encoded with Dolby Digital or DTS on

some LD or DVD players, the sound output delays for a

moment when playback resumes after a search because the

digital signal is selected again.

• When playing the LD source that has not been digitally

recorded, the sound may not be output for some LD players. In

this case, set the input mode to ANALOG.

INPUT MODE

VCR DVD TUNER CD

PHONO

CD RV AUX 1

VCR2/DVR

CBL

SAT

TAPE

VOLUME

DVD AUTO

PHONO

DVD

VCR2/DVR

VCR 1

D-TV/LD

CBL/SAT

CD-R

MD/TAPE

TUNER

V-A UX

Remote controlFront panel

Input mode

■ Notes on the digital signal

The digital input jacks of this unit can also handle

96-kHz sampling digital signals. (To utilize this, use a

source that supports 96-kHz sampling digital signals and

set the player for digital output. Refer to the operation

instructions for the player.) Note the following when a 96-

kHz sampling digital signal is input to this unit:

– DSP programs cannot be selected. Sound will be output

as normal 2-channel stereo sound from only the left and

right main speakers.

Note

• If “1B MAIN SP” on the SET MENU is set to SMALL and

“1E LFE/BASS OUT” is set to SWFR, or “1E LFE/BASS

OUT” is set to BOTH, the sound is also output from the

subwoofer.

–“Adjusting the Level of the Effect Speakers” described

on page 61 cannot be made.

■ Notes on playing DTS-CD/LDs

• If the digital output data of the player has been

processed in any way, you may not be able to perform

DTS decoding even if you make a digital connection

between this unit and the player.

• If you play a source encoded with a DTS signal and

set the input mode to ANALOG, this unit may

reproduce the noise of an unprocessed DTS signal. In

this case, connect the source to a digital input jack and

set the input mode to AUTO or DTS.

• If you switch the input mode to ANALOG while

playing a source encoded with a DTS signal, this unit

reproduces no sound.

• If you play a source encoded with a DTS signal with

the input mode set to AUTO;

– This unit automatically switches to the DTS-

decoding mode (The “t” indicator lights up.)

after having detected the DTS signal. When playback

of the DTS source is completed, the “t” indicator

may flash. While this indicator is flashing, only DTS

source can be played. If you want to play a normal

PCM source soon, set the input mode back to AUTO.

– The “t” indicator may flash when a search or

skip operation is performed while the DTS source is

playing back with the input mode set to AUTO. If

this status continues for longer than 30 seconds, this

unit will automatically switch from “DTS-decoding”

mode to PCM digital signal input mode. The “t”

indicator will turn off.

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

BASIC PLAYBACK

Selecting a Sound Field Program

You can enhance your listening experience by selecting a

DSP program. There are 11 programs with sub-programs

available with this unit. However the selection depends on

the input signal format and not all the sub-programs are

possible for all input signal formats. For details about

each program, see pages 30 to 35.

1 Set 10KEY/DSP to DSP on

the remote control.

2 Press PROGRAM l / h (one of the DSP

program buttons on the remote control) to

select the desired program.

The name of the selected program appears on the

front panel display.

BASS

SPEAKERS

BASS

EXTENSION

PROCESSOR

DIRECT

VOLUME

INPUT

INPUT MODE

VIDEO AUX

SILENT

PHONES

S VIDEO VIDEO AUDIOLR

6CH

INPUT

OPTICAL

STANDBY

NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER

TREBLE

– +

DIGITAL

EFFECT

– +

PROGRAM

STEREO

SET MENU

–

REC OUT

V-AUX

VCR2

/DVR

VCR1

PHONO

TUNER

MD/TAPE

DVD

SOURCE

D-TV/LD

CBL/SAT

CD-R

HALL 1

6.1/ES

DSP

10KEY

ROCK

CONCERT

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MUTE

VOLUME

STEREO

TV INPUT

TV VOL

PRESET

DISC

EFFECT

TV MUTE

CONCERT

VIDEO

THEATER

ENTER-

TAINMENT

HALL 2

CHURCH

JAZZ CLUB

SELECT

/DTS

SUR.

CHP/INDEX

A/B/C/D/E

100

11 12

234

1 2,3

3 After selecting the desired program, press

the same button repeatedly to select the

desired sub-program if available.

For example, to select the sub-program “DGTL Sci-

Fi”, press MOVIE THEATER 1 repeatedly.

Notes

• Choose a DSP program based on your listening preference, and

not on the name of the program. The acoustics of your listening

room affect the DSP program. Minimize the sound reflections

in your room to maximize the effect created by the program.

• When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects

the last DSP program used with that source.

• When you set this unit in the standby mode, the current source

and DSP program are memorized and are automatically

selected when you turn on the power again.

• If a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is input when the input mode

is set to AUTO, the DSP program (No. 9–11) automatically

switches to the appropriate decoding program.

• When a monaural source is being played with PRO LOGIC/

Normal or PRO LOGIC/Enhanced, PRO LOGIC Movie, or

Neo: 6 Cinema, no sound will be heard from the main speakers

and the rear speakers. Sound can only be heard from the center

speaker. However, if “1A CENTER SP” on the SET MENU is

set to NONE, the center channel sound is output from the main

speakers.

• When a source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks of this unit

is selected, the digital sound field processor cannot be used.

• When 96-kHz sampling digital signals are input to this unit, the

DSP program cannot be selected. In this case, the sound is

reproduced as normal 2-channel stereo.

LCR

LFE

MOVIE THEATER

VCR DVD TUNER CD

PHONO

CD RV AUX

DSP

DIGITAL

VCR2/DVR

CBL

SAT

TAPE

VOLUME

DGTL Sci-Fi

PROGRAM

Sub-program name

Program name

Front panel

Remote control

L C R

LFE

MOVIE THEATER

VCR DVD TUNER CD

PHONO

CD RV AUX

DSP

DIGITAL

VCR2/DVR

CBL

SAT

TAPE

VOLUME

DGTL Spectacle

HALL 1

6.1/ES

DSP

10KEY

ROCK

CONCERT

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

CONCERT

VIDEO

THEATER

ENTER-

TAINMENT

HALL 2

CHURCH

JAZZ CLUB

SELECT

/DTS

SUR.

CHP/INDEX

100

11 12

234

HALL 1

6.1/ES

DSP

10KEY

ROCK

CONCERT

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

CONCERT

VIDEO

THEATER

ENTER-

TAINMENT

HALL 2

CHURCH

JAZZ CLUB

SELECT

/DTS

SUR.

CHP/INDEX

100

11 12

234

Program name

Sub-program name

DSP

10KEY

BASIC PLAYBACK

3 Press the numeric button 12 repeatedly to

select the decoder; PRO LOGIC, PRO LOGIC

or Neo: 6.

The decoder selection switches among PRO LOGIC,

PRO LOGIC and Neo: 6 on the front panel

display.

4 After deciding on the decoder (PRO LOGIC

or Neo: 6), select the mode to suit the

source by pressing the numeric button 11.

The selection switches as follow;

PRO LOGIC

Movie ↔ PRO LOGIC Music

(when PRO LOGIC

is selected)

Neo: 6 Cinema ↔ Neo: 6 Music

(when Neo: 6 is selected)

■ Playing the Dolby Digital Matrix

6.1 or DTS ES software

Press 6.1/ES to turn on the Dolby Digital Matrix 6.1 or

DTS ES decoder to listen to the Dolby Digital Matrix 6.1

and DTS ES software with a rear center speaker.

The display changes AUTO → Disc6.1 → Mtrx6.1 →

OFF each time the 6.1/ES button is pressed.

Notes

• No sound will be output from the rear center speaker if you

have set “1C REAR L/R SP” on the SET MENU to NONE.

• The rear center speaker can be used when playing a 5.1-

channel source also.

Selecting PRO LOGIC or Neo: 6

You can enjoy the 2-channel sources decoded into five or

six discrete channels by selecting PRO LOGIC

or Neo:

6 in the program No. 11.

1 Select a 2-channel source and start playback

on the source component.

2 Select PRO LOGIC (Movie/Music) or Neo: 6

(Cinema/Music) by pressing PROGRAM l /

h on the front panel.

(For remote control only)

2 Press the numeric button 11 on the remote

control.

The previously selected sub program appears on the

front panel display.

PRO

LOGIC

VCR DVD TUNER CD

PHONO

CD RV AUX

DSP

VCR2/DVR

CBL

SAT

TAPE

VOLUME

PRO LOGIC

HALL 1

6.1/ES

DSP

10KEY

ROCK

CONCERT

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

CONCERT

VIDEO

THEATER

ENTER-

TAINMENT

HALL 2

CHURCH

JAZZ CLUB

SELECT

/DTS

SUR.

CHP/INDEX

100

11 12

234

Remote control

HALL 1

6.1/ES

DSP

10KEY

ROCK

CONCERT

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

CONCERT

VIDEO

THEATER

ENTER-

TAINMENT

HALL 2

CHURCH

JAZZ CLUB

SELECT

/DTS

SUR.

CHP/INDEX

100

11 12

234

HALL 1

6.1/ES

DSP

10KEY

ROCK

CONCERT

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

CONCERT

VIDEO

THEATER

ENTER-

TAINMENT

HALL 2

CHURCH

JAZZ CLUB

SELECT

/DTS

SUR.

CHP/INDEX

100

11 12

234

BASS

SPEAKERS

BASS

EXTENSION

PROCESSOR

DIRECT

VOLUME

INPUT

INPUT MODE

VIDEO AUX

SILENT

PHONES

S VIDEO VIDEO AUDIOLR

6CH

INPUT

OPTICAL

STANDBY

NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER

TREBLE

– +

DIGITAL

EFFECT

– +

PROGRAM

STEREO

SET MENU

–

REC OUT

V-AUX

VCR2

/DVR

VCR1

PHONO

TUNER

MD/TAPE

DVD

SOURCE

D-TV/LD

CBL/SAT

CD-R

HALL 1

6.1/ES

DSP

10KEY

ROCK

CONCERT

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MUTE

VOLUME

STEREO

TV INPUT

TV VOL

PRESET

DISC

EFFECT

TV MUTE

CONCERT

VIDEO

THEATER

ENTER-

TAINMENT

HALL 2

CHURCH

JAZZ CLUB

SELECT

/DTS

SUR.

CHP/INDEX

A/B/C/D/E

100

11 12

234

2,3,4

PROGRAM

Front panel

6.1/ES

CHP/INDEX

The “ c ” indicator lights up.

LCR

RC RR

MOVIE THEATER

VCR DVD TUNER CD

PHONO

CD RV AUX

DSP

DIGITAL

VCR2/DVR

CBL

SAT

TAPE

VOLUME

6.1

Spectacle 6.1

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

BASIC PLAYBACK

■ Normal Stereo Reproduction

Press STEREO/EFFECT to turn off the sound

effect for normal stereo reproduction.

Press STEREO/EFFECT again to turn the sound

effect back on.

Notes

• If you turn off the sound effect, no sound is output from the

center speaker, rear speakers and rear center speaker.

• If you turn off the sound effect while a Dolby Digital or DTS

signal is being output, the dynamic range of the signal is

automatically compressed and the sounds of the center and rear

speaker channels are mixed and output from the main speakers.

• The volume may be greatly reduced when you turn off the

sound effect or if you set “11 D-RANGE” on the SET MENU

to MIN. In this case turn on the sound effect.

■ Displaying the information about

the input source

You can display the information such as the type, format

and sampling frequency of the signal input from the

component connected to this unit.

1 Select the input source you want to obtain

the information about by pressing an input

selector button.

2 Press STEREO/EFFECT to

light STEREO.

3 Press k/n to display the information about

the input signal.

AUTO: This mode automatically switches Dolby

Digital Matrix 6.1/DTS ES Matrix 6.1/DTS

ES Discrete 6.1 depending on the signal in

the input source that this unit can detect.

Rear center speaker does not work for 5.1

channel sources.

Disc6.1: This mode can be selected only when the

source with DTS ES Discrete format has

been detected.

Mtrx6.1: This mode makes 6-channel playback of the

input source through the Matrix 6.1 decoder.

OFF: Rear center speaker does not work in this

mode. (Except for when the DSP program

“6ch Stereo” or “Neo: 6” is selected.)

■ Virtual CINEMA DSP and SILENT

CINEMA DSP

Virtual CINEMA DSP

With the Virtual CINEMA DSP, you can enjoy all the

DSP programs without rear speakers. It creates the virtual

speakers to reproduce the natural sound field.

The sound field processing is changed to the Virtual

CINEMA DSP mode according to the selected DSP

program by setting “1C REAR L/R SP” on the SET

MENU to NONE.

Note

• This unit is not set in the virtual CINEMA DSP mode even if

“1C REAR L/R SP” is set to NONE in the following cases:

– when the 6ch Stereo, DOLBY DIGITAL Normal, Pro Logic

Normal, Pro Logic , DTS Normal or Neo: 6 program is

selected;

– when the sound effect is turned off;

– when 6CH INPUT is selected as the input source;

– when 96-kHz sampling digital signals are input to this unit;

– when using the test tone; or

– when connecting the headphones.

SILENT CINEMA DSP

You can enjoy the powerful sound field as if there were

actual speakers with the SILENT CINEMA DSP. You can

listen to SILENT CINEMA DSP by connecting your

headphones to the PHONES jack while the digital sound

field processor is on. Enjoy all the DSP program using the

headphones. The “SILENT” indicator lights up on the

front panel display. (If the sound effect is off, you listen to

the source with normal stereo reproduction.)

Notes

• This unit is not set in the SILENT CINEMA DSP mode even if

the sound effect is on;

– when 96-kHz sampling digital signals are input to this unit.

• The sound of LFE channel will be mixed and output from the

headphone.

STEREO

EFFECT

STEREO

EFFECT

Front panel

Remote control

PHONO

DVD

VCR2/DVR

VCR 1

D-TV/LD

CBL/SAT

CD-R

MD/TAPE

TUNER

V-A UX

STEREO

EFFECT

PARAMETER

SET MENU

LEVEL

ON SCREEN

TESTSLEEP

DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PROCESSING (DSP)

Understanding Sound Fields

A sound field is defined as the “characteristic sound reflections of a

particular space.” In concert halls and other music venues, we hear

early reflections and reverberations as well as the direct sound

produced by the artist(s). The variations in the early reflections and

other reverberations among the different music venues is what gives

each venue its special and recognizable sound quality.

YAMAHA sent teams of sound engineers all around the world to

measure the sound reflections of famous concert halls and music

venues, and collect detailed sound field information such as the

direction, strength, range, and delay time of those reflections. Then

we stored this enormous amount of data in the ROM chips of this

unit.

■ Recreating a sound field

Recreating the sound field of a concert hall or an opera house requires localizing the virtual sound sources in your

listening room. The traditional stereo system that uses only two speakers is not capable of recreating a realistic sound

field. YAMAHA’s DSP requires four effect speakers to recreate sound fields based on the measured sound field data.

The processor controls the strength and delay time of the signals output from the four effect speakers to localize the

virtual sound sources in a full circle around the listener.

Hi-Fi DSP Programs

The following list gives you a brief description of the sound fields produced by each of the DSP programs. Keep in

mind that most of these are precise digital recreations of actual acoustic environments.

No.

CONCERT HALL 1

CONCERT HALL 2

CHURCH

Europe Hall A

Europe Hall B

U.S.A. Hall C

Live Concert

Freiburg

Royaumont

Features

This is a large fan-shaped concert hall with approximately 2500 seats.

There is relatively little reflection from the walls, and sound spreads

finely and beautifully.

This is a large shoe-box type concert hall with less than 2400 seats

located in Frankfurt. This hall has a very solid, powerful sound. The

listener’s virtual seat is in the center-right section on the first floor.

This is a large 2600 seat concert hall in the United States which features

a fairly traditional European design. The middle and high frequencies

are richly and beautifully reinforced.

A large round concert hall with a rich surround effect. Pronounced

reflections from all directions emphasize the extension of sounds. The

sound field has a great deal of presence, and your virtual seat is near the

center, close to the stage.

This program recreates the acoustic environment of a big church located

in south Germany. The reverberation delay is very long while the early

reflections are smaller than with other sound field programs.

This program features the sound field created by the refectory (dining

hall) of a beautiful medieval Gothic monastery located in Royaumont on

the outskirts of Paris.

Program

English

INTRODUCTION PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PROCESSING (DSP)

No.

JAZZ CLUB

ROCK CONCERT

ENTERTAINMENT

Village Gate

The Bottom Line

The Roxy Theatre

Arena

Disco

6ch Stereo

Features

This is the sound field at a jazz club in New York. It is in a basement

and has a relatively spacious floor area. The listener’s virtual seat is at

the center left of the hall.

This is the sound field at stage front in “The Bottom Line”, a famous

New York jazz club. The floor can seat 300 people to the left and right

in a sound field offering a real and vibrant sound.

The ideal program for lively, dynamic rock music. The data for this

program was recorded at LA’s “hottest” rock club. The listener’s virtual

seat is at the center-left of the hall.

A classic shoe-box type concert hall. This program gives you long

delays between direct sounds and effect sounds, with the extraordinarily

spacious feel of a large arena.

This program recreates the acoustic environment of a lively disco in the

heart of a big city. The sound is dense and highly concentrated.

Using this program increases the listening position range. This is a

sound field suitable for background music at parties.

Program

CINEMA-DSP

Sound Design of CINEMA-DSP

Filmmakers intend the dialog to be located right on the screen, the effect sound a little farther back, the music spread

even farther back, and the surround sound around the listener. Of course, all of these sounds must be synchronized with

the images on the screen.

CINEMA-DSP is an upgraded version of YAMAHA DSP specially designed for movie soundtracks. CINEMA-DSP

integrates the DTS, Dolby Digital, and Dolby Pro Logic surround sound technologies with YAMAHA DSP sound field

programs to provide the surround sound field. It recreates the most complete movie sound design in your audio room. In

CINEMA-DSP sound field programs, YAMAHA’s exclusive DSP processing is added to the right and left Main and

Center channels, so the listener can enjoy realistic dialogue, depth of sound, smooth transition between sound sources,

and a surround sound field that goes beyond the screen.

When a DTS or Dolby Digital signal is detected, the CINEMA-DSP sound field processor automatically chooses the

most suitable sound field program for that signal.

L SURROUND SOUND FIELD

R SURROUND SOUND FIELD

PRESENCE SOUND FIELD

DIALOG

EFFECT MUSIC

In addition to the DSP, this unit is equipped with various precise decoders; Dolby Pro Logic/Pro Logic /DTS Neo: 6

decoder for 2-channel sources, Dolby Digital/DTS decoder for multi-channel sources and Dolby Digital Matrix 6.1 or

DTS ES decoder for a rear center channel. You can select the CINEMA-DSP program to optimize these decoders and

the DSP sound patterns depending on the input source.

English

INTRODUCTION PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

CINEMA-DSP

The 6-channel soundtracks found on 70-mm film produce precise sound field localization and rich, deep sound without

using matrix processing. This unit’s MOVIE THEATER programs provide the same quality of sound and sound

localization that 6-channel soundtracks do. The built-in Dolby Digital or DTS decoder brings the professional-quality

sound designed for movie theaters into your home. With this unit’s MOVIE THEATER programs, you can recreate a

dynamic sound that gives you the feeling of being at a public theater in your listening room by using Dolby Digital or

DTS technology.

■ Dolby Digital/DTS + DSP sound field effect

These programs use YAMAHA’s tri-field DSP processing

on each of the Dolby Digital or DTS signals for the front,

left surround and right surround channels. This processing

enables this unit to reproduce the immense sound field

and surround expression of a Dolby Digital- or DTS-

equipped movie theater without sacrificing the clear

separation of all channels.

■ Dolby Digital Matrix 6.1/DTS ES + DSP sound field effect

These programs provide you with the maximum experience of the spacious surround effects since an extra rear center

DSP sound field created from the rear center channel is added.

■ Dolby Pro Logic + DSP sound field effect

Most movie software has 4-channel (left, center, right and

surround) sound information encoded by Dolby Surround

matrix processing and stored on the left and right tracks.

These signals are processed by the Dolby Pro Logic

decoder. The MOVIE THEATER programs are designed

to recreate the spaciousness and delicate nuances of

sound that tend to be lost in the encoding and decoding

processes.

■ Dolby Pro Logic /DTS Neo: 6

Dolby Pro Logic and DTS Neo: 6 equipped on this unit decode the 2-channel Dolby Surround software into five

discrete full-range channels (3 channels in front and 2 or 3 channels in rear). They also provide two modes; MOVIE/

CINEMA for movies and MUSIC for 2-channel source.

Surround DSP

sound field

Right surround DSP

sound field

Presence DSP

sound field

Left surround DSP

sound field

Presence DSP

sound field

CINEMA-DSP

CINEMA-DSP Programs

■ For movie programs: No. 9 to 11

According to the input signal format, this unit automatically chooses the appropriate decoder and DSP sound field

pattern.

Table of Program Names for Each Input Format

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

DOLBY

DIGITAL

DTS DIGITAL

SUR

PRO LOGIC

DTS Neo: 6

2 channel

Stereo

70 mm Spectacle

70 mm Sci-Fi

70 mm Adventure

70 mm General

—

Normal

Enhanced

Movie

Music

Cinema

Music

DOLBY DIGITAL

DGTL Spectacle

DGTL Sci-Fi

DGTL Adventure

DGTL General

Normal

Enhanced

—

5.1 channel

DTS

DTS Spectacle

DTS Sci-Fi

DTS Adventure

DTS General

—

Normal

Enhanced

—

DTS ES

Spectacle ES

Sci-Fi ES

Adventure ES

General ES

—

ES Matrix 6.1

ES Discrete 6.1

Enhanced ES

—

6.1 channel *

Input

Program

DOLBY DIGITAL

Spectacle 6.1

Sci-Fi 6.1

Adventure 6.1

General 6.1

Matrix 6.1

Enhanced 6.1

—

*1 means the 6.1/ES decoder is ON.

*2 means the DTS ES software encoded with Discrete 6.1 is input.

• If a Dolby Digital signal or DTS signal is input when the input mode is set to AUTO, the DSP program will be automatically

switched to the Dolby Digital playback sound field or DTS playback sound field.

• If Dolby Digital Surround EX software or DTS ES software is played when AUTO is selected by pressing the 6.1/ES button on the

remote control, the Dolby Digital Matrix 6.1 or DTS ES decoder usually turns on and the corresponding DSP program is selected.

• 6.1/ES on the remote control can be used to play Dolby Digital or DTS 5.1 channel sources with rear center speaker. In this case the

program name changes to the corresponding name for 6.1 channel.

• When playing 6.1 channel source with 6.1/ES on the remote control off, the program name changes to the corresponding name for

5.1 channel.

Note

• The “ ” indicator does not light up when selecting the program No. 11 except for the Enhanced mode.

No.

English

INTRODUCTION PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

CINEMA-DSP

Program

Enhanced Mode

The following list gives you a brief description of the sound fields produced by each of the DSP programs. Keep in

mind that most of these are precise digital recreations of actual acoustic environments.

Note

• Select the DSP program that you feel sounds best regardless of the name and description given for it below.

No.

Features

This program creates the extremely wide sound field of a 70-mm movie theater. It

precisely reproduces the source sound in detail, making both the video and the sound

field incredibly real. This is ideal for any kind of video source encoded with Dolby

Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS (especially large-scale movie productions).

This program clearly reproduces dialog and sound effects in the latest sound form of

science fiction films, thus creating a broad and expansive cinematic space amid the

silence. You can enjoy science fiction films in a virtual-space sound field that includes

Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital and DTS-encoded software employing the most advanced

techniques.

This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the sound design of the newest 70-mm

and multichannel soundtrack films. The sound field is made to be similar to that of the

newest movie theaters, so the reverberations of the sound field itself are restrained as

much as possible.

This program is for reproducing sounds from 70-mm and multichannel soundtrack films,

and is characterized by a soft and extensive sound field. The presence sound field is

relatively narrow. It spatially spreads all around and toward the screen, restraining the

echo effect of conversations without losing clarity.

This program ideally simulates the multi-surround speaker systems of the 35-mm film

theaters. Dolby Pro Logic decoding, Dolby Digital decoding or DTS decoding and digital

sound field processing create precise effects without altering the original sound

orientation.

The surround effects produced by this sound field wrap around the viewer naturally from

the back to the left and right, and toward the screen.

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

Spectacle

Sci-Fi

Adventure

General

No.

ENTERTAINMENT

CONCERT VIDEO

TV THEATER

Game

Pop/Rock

Opera

Mono Movie

Variety/Sports

Features

This program adds a deep and spatial feeling to video game sounds.

This program produces an enthusiastic atmosphere and lets you feel as

if you are at an actual jazz or rock concert.

This program provides excellent vocal depth and overall clarity by

restraining excessive reverberation.

The surround sound field is relatively moderate but it reproduces

beautiful sound using data collected from a concert hall.

This program is provided for reproducing monaural video sources (such

as old movies). The program produces the optimum reverberation to

create sound depth using only the presence sound field.

Though the presence sound field is relatively narrow, the surround

sound field employs the sound environment of a large concert hall. With

this program, you can enjoy watching various TV programs such as

news, variety shows, music programs, or sports programs.

Program

■ For audio-video sources in 2-channel: No. 6 to 8

BASIC RECORDING

REC OUT allows you to record one source while

watching and/or listening to another source.

Recording adjustments and other operations are

performed from the recording components. Refer to the

operation instructions for these components.

1 Turn on the power to this unit and all

connected components.

2 Select the source component you want to

record from by using REC OUT.

• To record the current input source that you are

watching or listening to, set REC OUT to

SOURCE.

• To record the other source than the one that you

are watching or listening to, set REC OUT to the

source you want to record.

Note

• At this setting, you can change the source to listen to or watch

during recording by pressing INPUT l/h (one of the input

selector buttons on the remote control).

3 Start playback (or select a broadcast station)

on the source component.

4 Start recording on the recording component.

• Setting REC OUT to SOURCE and using the BGV function

(see page 25) allows the recording of audio and video from a

different source.

Notes

• Do a test recording before you start an actual recording.

• When this unit is set in the standby mode, you cannot record

between other components connected to this unit.

• The setting of BASS, TREBLE, BASS EXTENSION,

VOLUME, “3 L/R BALANCE” on the SET MENU and DSP

programs does not affect the recorded material.

• A source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks of this unit

cannot be recorded.

• S-video and composite video signals pass independently

through this unit’s video circuits. Therefore, when recording or

dubbing video signals, if your video source component is

connected to provide only an S-video (or only a composite

video) signal, you can record only an S-video (or only a

composite video) signal by your VCR.

• A given input source is not output on the same REC OUT

channel. (For example, the signal input from VCR 1 IN is not

output on VCR 1 OUT.)

• Check the copyright laws in your country to record from

records, CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material

may infringe copyright laws.

If you playback a video source that uses scrambled or

encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the

picture itself may be disturbed due to those signals.

■ Special considerations when

recording DTS software

The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. Attempting to

digitally record the DTS bitstream will result in noise

being recorded. Therefore, if you want to use this unit to

record sources that have DTS signals recorded on them,

the following considerations and adjustments need to be

made.

For LDs, DVDs and CDs encoded with DTS, when your

player is compatible with the DTS format, follow its

operation instruction to make a setting so that the analog

signal will be output from the player.

■ Timer playback/recording

This unit can perform playback or recording with an

external timer (not supplied). Refer to the operation

instruction for the component and the timer to be used.

Notes

• The stored data such as input source will be reflected in the

playback or recording with the timer.

• If you do not want any sound output during the recording with

a timer, turn the volume down.

Memory back-up

The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data

(input source, volume level, set menu settings and so

on) from being lost even if this unit is in the standby

mode (disconnected from the AC outlet). However if

the timer is turned off for more than one week, the

stored data will be lost.

BASS

SPEAKERS

BASS

EXTENSION

PROCESSOR

DIRECT

VOLUME

INPUT

INPUT MODE

VIDEO AUX

SILENT

PHONES

S VIDEO VIDEO AUDIOLR

6CH

INPUT

OPTICAL

STANDBY

NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER

TREBLE

– +

DIGITAL

EFFECT

– +

PROGRAM

STEREO

SET MENU

–

REC OUT

V-AUX

VCR2

/DVR

VCR1

PHONO

TUNER

MD/TAPE

DVD

SOURCE

D-TV/LD

CBL/SAT

CD-R

VCR2

/DVR

V-AUX

VCR 1

CBL/SAT

D-TV/LD

DVD

SOURCE

REC OUT

MD/TAPE

CD-R

TUNER

PHONO

VCR2

/DVR

V-AUX

VCR 1

CBL/SAT

D-TV/LD

DVD

SOURCE

REC OUT

MD/TAPE

CD-R

TUNER

PHONO

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

The remote control can operate other A/V components of YAMAHA and other manufacturers as well as this unit. To

control those components, you must set up remote control with the manufacturer codes.

This remote control also has two sophisticated features: Learn and Macro. The Learn feature allows it to acquire

functions from the remote controls of other components in your system (or other household appliances) equipped with

an infrared remote control receiver. The Macro feature allows you to program a series of operations in sequence for

operation by a single button, or to use the factory-set macros to operate other YAMAHA components. These features

make it possible for you to reduce the number of remote control in your entertainment room.

Notes

• For the operating distance of the remote control and notes about batteries, see pages 3 and 7.

• For the name and function of each part and button, see pages 6 and 7.

Control Area

■ Control area of this unit

The control area of this unit is the shaded area shown

below. You can use the functions within this area no

matter which component control area is selected.

■ Control area for each component

The component control area is the shaded area shown

below. Each component has different functions for the

operation buttons in the component control area. The

component which has been chosen by pressing an input

selector button or SOURCE SELECT k/n can be

controlled and the display window shows the

corresponding name of the component to be operated.

Input selector buttons and Å/

ı buttons switch the control

area for each component.

* Å/ı buttons are to operate

the other components that are

not connected to this unit. Å

and ı buttons cannot be used

as an input selector button.

Factory setting:

Å ........... LD player

ı ..... Satellite tuner

Component control area

There are 13 component control areas (See pages 45 to 49). You can

set up the manufacturer code and program other remote control

functions in each area. See pages 38 to 39.

Input selector

buttons, and Å/ı

buttons

TRANSMIT

RE-NAME

STANDBY

6CH INPUT

SOUND

SYSTEM

CLEAR LEARN MACRO

OFF ON

MACRO

PHONO

DVD

VCR2/DVR

VCR 1

TITLE

CHAPTER

PAUSESTOPPOWER

REC

HALL 1

6.1/ES

DSP

10KEY

ROCK

CONCERT

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MUTE

VOLUME

STEREO

TV INPUT

TV VOL

PRESET

DISC

PARAMETER

SET MENU

EFFECT

LEVEL

ON SCREEN

TESTSLEEP

TV MUTE

CONCERT

VIDEO

THEATER

ENTER-

TAINMENT

HALL 2

CHURCH

JAZZ CLUB

SELECT

/DTS

SUR.

CHP/INDEX

A/B/C/D/E

SELECT

DISPLAY

SOURCE

PLAY

– +

ENTER

D-TV/LD

CBL/SAT

CD-R

MD/TAPE

TUNER

V-A UX

POWER

100

11 12

234

TRANSMIT

RE-NAME

STANDBY

6CH INPUT

SYSTEM

CLEAR LEARN MACRO

OFF ON

MACRO

PHONO

DVD

VCR2/DVR

VCR 1

DSP

10KEY

MUTE

VOLUME

STEREO

EFFECT

SELECT

SOURCE

D-TV/LD

CBL/SAT

CD-R

MD/TAPE

TUNER

V-A UX

POWER

REC

HALL 1

6.1/ES

ROCK

CONCERT

MOVIE

THEATER 1

TV INPUT

TV VOL

TV MUTE

CHP/INDEX

A/B/C/D/E

DISPLAY

SOUND

TITLE

CHAPTER

PAUSESTOP

MOVIE

THEATER 2

PRESET

DISC

CONCERT

VIDEO

THEATER

ENTER-

TAINMENT

HALL 2

CHURCH

JAZZ CLUB

SELECT

/DTS

SUR.

PLAY

– +

ENTER

100

11 12

234

POWER

REC

HALL 1

6.1/ES

ROCK

CONCERT

MOVIE

THEATER 1

TV INPUT

TV VOL

TV MUTE

CHP/INDEX

A/B/C/D/E

DISPLAY

SOUND

TITLE

CHAPTER

PAUSESTOP

MOVIE

THEATER 2

PRESET

DISC

CONCERT

VIDEO

THEATER

ENTER-

TAINMENT

HALL 2

CHURCH

JAZZ CLUB

SELECT

/DTS

SUR.

PLAY

– +

ENTER

100

11 12

234

DSP is selected

10 key is selected

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

1 Press an input selector button, Å or ı to

select the source component you want to set

up.

2 Press and hold LEARN for about 3 seconds

by using a ballpoint pen or similar object.

“SETUP” and the selected component name appear

alternately in the display window.

Notes

• Press LEARN for at least 3 seconds, otherwise the learning

process is started.

• If you do not press any button within 30 seconds during step 3,

the setup process is canceled. If this happens, start over from

step 2.

3 Press k / n to select the name of your

component’s manufacturer.

You will find the names of most worldwide audio-

video manufacturers in alphabetical order in the

display window.

If you want to change a library (component

category), press l / h. You can set a

different component from the input selector

name.

Library choices: DVD, LD, CD, CD-R, MD, TAPE,

TUNER, AMP, TV, CABLE, DBS, SAT, VCR

Note

If the manufacturer of your component has more than one codes,

try each of them until you find the correct one as checking if it

works following step 4.

4 Press one of the buttons shaded below to

check if it works for the component being

set. If it does, the manufacturer code setting

has been correctly made.

• If you continuously want to set up another code for another

component, press ENTER and repeat steps 1, 3 and 4.

5 Press LEARN again to exit from the setup

mode.

Notes

• If you have already programmed a remote control function for

a button, the function by learning or macro programming takes

priority over the setup manufacturer code’s function.

•“ERROR” appears in the display window under the following

circumstances:

– when pressing a button other than the cursor and ENTER;

– when pressing more than one button at once; or

– when MACRO ON/OFF, 10KEY/DSP or PARAMETER/SET

MENU is switched to another position.

Setting the Manufacturer Code

You can control other components by setting a

manufacturer code. A code can be set up in each

component control area.

The following table shows factory-set component

(Library: component category) and the manufacturer code

for each area. If you are to make a setting for different

component from the factory setting, change the library as

described in step 3 on right.

LEARN

Input area

PHONO

TUNER

V-AUX

CBL/SAT

MD/TAPE

CD-R

D-TV/LD

VCR 1

VCR 2/DVR

DVD

Component category

(Library)

SATELLITE TUNER

TUNER

VCR

CABLE

CD-R

VCR

DVD

Manufacturer

YAMAHA

–

YAMAHA

–

YAMAHA

–

YAMAHA

ENTER

6CH INPUT

SOUND

TITLE

CHAPTER

PAUSESTOPPOWER

REC

SELECT

DISPLAY

SOURCE

PLAY

– +

ENTER

PHONO

DVD

VCR2/DVR

VCR 1

D-TV/LD

CBL/SAT

CD-R

MD/TAPE

TUNER

V-A UX

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

5 Press the button for which you want to

program the new function.

“LEARN” is displayed.

6 Press and hold the button on the other

remote control that has the function you

want to program into this remote control

until “OK” appears in the display window.

Notes

•“NG” appears in the display window when programming has

not been done correctly. In this case, start over from step 5.

• This remote control can learn approximately 120 functions.

However depending on the signals learned, “FULL” may

appear in the display window much earlier than this number. In

this case, clear unnecessary programmed functions to make

further learning on the remote control.

7 Repeat steps 5 and 6 to program additional

functions.

8 Press LEARN again to exit from the learning

mode.

Notes

• It is also possible to program in the control area of this unit

with 10KEY/DSP set to DSP. However, if you program

functions in this area, you cannot control this unit and select a

DSP program.

• If the batteries in the other remote control are weak, they may

not have enough power to transmit signals to this remote

control.

• When the remote controls are either too close together or too

far apart, you may not be able to program this remote control.

• Direct sunlight interferes with infrared rays.

•“ERROR” appears in the display window in the following

circumstances:

– when pressing more than one button at once; or

– when MACRO ON/OFF is switched to another position.

Programming a New Remote

Control Function (Learn Feature)

If you want to program functions not included in the basic

operations covered by the manufacturer code, or a

manufacturer code is not available, the following

procedure needs to be performed. The possible

programming area is the same as a component control

area, so the buttons are programmable independently for

each source component area.

Note

• This remote control transmits infrared rays. If the other remote

control also uses infrared rays, this remote control can learn

most of the other remote control’s functions. However, you

may not be able to program some special signals or extremely

long transmissions. (Refer to the operation instructions for the

other remote control.)

1 Set 10KEY/DSP to 10KEY.

2 Press an input selector button, Å or ı to

select a source component.

3 Place this remote control and the other

remote control about 5 to 10 cm apart on a

flat surface so that their infrared transmitters

are aimed at each other.

4 Press LEARN by using a ballpoint pen or

similar object.

Do not press and hold LEARN longer than three

seconds. Otherwise this unit enters the manufacturer

code setting mode.

Note

• If you do not press any button within 30 seconds during steps 5

and 6, the learning process is canceled. If this happens, start

over from step 4.

TRANSMIT

RE-NAME

STANDBY

6CH INPUT

SYSTEM

CLEAR LEARN MACRO

OFF ON

MACRO

PHONO

DVD

VCR2/DVR

VCR 1

TITLE

SOURCE

ENTER

D-TV/LD

CBL/SAT

CD-R

MD/TAPE

TUNER

V-AU X

POWER

5 to 10 cm (2 to 4 inch)

TRANSMIT

RE-NAME

STANDBY

6CH INPUT

SYSTEM

CLEAR LEARN MACRO

OFF ON

MACRO

PHONO

DVD

VCR2/DVR

VCR 1

TITLE

SOURCE

ENTER

D-TV/LD

CBL/SAT

CD-R

MD/TAPE

TUNER

V-AU X

POWER

LEARN

TRANSMIT

RE-NAME

STANDBY

6CH INPUT

SYSTEM

CLEAR LEARN MACRO

OFF ON

MACRO

PHONO

DVD

VCR2/DVR

VCR 1

TITLE

SOURCE

ENTER

D-TV/LD

CBL/SAT

CD-R

MD/TAPE

TUNER

V-AU X

POWER

DSP

10KEY

Flashes alternately

PHONO

DVD

VCR2/DVR

VCR 1

D-TV/LD

CBL/SAT

CD-R

MD/TAPE

TUNER

V-A UX

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

Using the Macro Feature

The Macro feature makes it possible to perform a series of operations by pressing just one button. For example, when

you want to play a CD, normally you would turn on the components, select the CD input, and press the play button to

start playback. The Macro feature lets you perform all those operations by simply pressing the CD macro button. The

macro buttons (the input selector buttons, Å and ı buttons, SYSTEM POWER and STANDBY) are factory set with

macro programs. You can also program your own macros (see pages 41 and 42).

*1 In order to turn on some components (including YAMAHA components) connected to this unit, connect those

components to the AC OUTLETS on the rear panel. (Power control may not be synchronized with this unit

depending on the component. For details, please refer to the operation instruction for the connected component.)

*2 If the macro you select includes power control functions, the component may be turned off if it is already on when

you press the macro button. For example, if your TV is on and you press the SYSTEM POWER macro button, the

TV is turned off.

*3 Playback can be started with any YAMAHA remote control-compatible MD recorders, CD players, CD recorders,

DVD players, and LD players. When using macros to operate other components, it is either necessary to program the

PLAY button on the control area of that component (see page 39) or to set up a manufacturer code (see page 38).

*4 When TUNER is selected as the input source, this unit receives the last station when this unit is set in the standby

mode.

(DVD area) (*3)

Press one of the macro buttons

Automatically transmits signals of each button sequentially

SYSTEM

POWER

PLAY

(CD area)

Macro buttons

PHONO

V-AUX

TUNER

MD/TAPE

CD-R

D-TV/LD

CBL/SAT

VCR 1

VCR2/DVR

DVD

STANDBY

SYSTEM

POWER

First Second

–

Third

–

PHONO

V-AUX

TUNER

MD/TAPE

CD-R

D-TV/LD

CBL/SAT

VCR 1

VCR2/DVR

DVD

SYSTEM

POWER

STANDBY

POWER

PLAY

(*1)

(D-TV/LD area) (*2)

PLAY

(MD/TAPE area) (*3)

(CD-R area) (*3)

(CD area) (*3)

(VCR 1 area) (*3)

(VCR 2/DVR area) (*3)

(*4)

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

2 Press a macro button for which you want to

program the macro operation.

The button you chose for programming the macro

operation and the selected component name appear

alternately in the display window.

Note

•“AGAIN” appears in the display window when a button other

than the macro buttons is pressed.

• If you want to change the source component, use SOURCE

SELECT k / n or input selector buttons. When you use the

input selector buttons, selecting the input is programmed as a

macro step, whereas SOURCE SELECT k / n only changes

the component.

3 Press the buttons of the functions that you

want to include in the macro operation

sequence in order.

• You can set up to 10 steps (10 functions). After you have set 10

steps, “FULL” appears and the remote control automatically

exits from the macro mode.

Note

•“NG” appears in the display window when programming has

not been done correctly. In this case, start over from step 2.

■ Operating the macro

1 Set MACRO ON/OFF to ON.

2 Press a macro button.

Notes

• When you have finished using the Macro feature, set MACRO

ON/OFF to OFF.

• While this unit is carrying out a macro program, this unit does

not receive any other button’s function until the macro

operation has been completed (the TRANSMIT indicator stops

flashing).

• Continue to aim the remote control at the component the macro

is operating until the macro operation has been completed.

■ Programming a macro

You can program your own macros and use the Macro

feature to transmit many remote control commands by

pressing a single button.

Notes

• The factory-set macro is not cleared when a new macro is

programmed for a button. The factory-set macro can be used

again when the programmed macro is cleared.

• It is not possible to add a new signal (macro step) to the

factory-set macro. Programming a macro changes all macro

contents.

• A macro programming is used to transmit learning or setup (or

YAMAHA preset) button signals of this remote control to a

macro button. If necessary, set up the manufacturer code or

program a function with the remote control for your

component.

• This remote control handles button signals that operate

continuously, such as volume control, as short time interval

codes. Macro programming that include these types of macro

steps are therefore not recommended.

1 Press MACRO by using a ballpoint pen or

similar object.

“MCR ?” appears in the display window.

Note

• If you do not press any button within 30 seconds during steps 2

and 3, the macro programming process is canceled. If this

happens, start over from step 1.

TRANSMIT

RE-NAME

STANDBY

SYSTEM

CLEAR LEARN MACRO

OFF ON

MACRO

PHONO

DVD

VCR2/DVR

VCR 1

D-TV/LD

CBL/SAT

CD-R

MD/TAPE

TUNER

V-A UX

POWER

Macro buttons

MACRO

MACRO ON/OFF

MACRO

indicate the number

of macro steps you

entered

STANDBY

6CH INPUT

SOUND

SYSTEM

PHONO

DVD

VCR2/DVR

VCR 1

TITLE

CHAPTER

PAUSESTOPPOWER

REC

SELECT

DISPLAY

SOURCE

PLAY

– +

ENTER

D-TV/LD

CBL/SAT

CD-R

MD/TAPE

TUNER

V-A UX

POWER

MCR 2 : DVD p

MCR 1 : DVD a

appear alternately so that you can

set up the next step

PHONO

DVD

VCR2/DVR

VCR 1

D-TV/LD

CBL/SAT

CD-R

MD/TAPE

TUNER

V-A UX

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

RE-NAME

4 Press MACRO again when

the operation sequence

you want to program is

complete.

Note

•“ERROR” appears in the display window under the following

circumstances:

– when pressing more than one button at once; or

– when MACRO ON/OFF is switched to another position.

Memory back-up

If the remote control is without batteries for more than

3 minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the

remote control, the contents of the memory may be

cleared. When the memory is cleared, insert new

batteries, set up the manufacturer code and program

any acquired functions that may have been cleared.

Changing the Source Name in the

Display Window

You can change the name that appears in the display

window on the remote control if you want to use the

different name from the original input selector button

names. This is useful when different component is set in

the input selector button.

1 Press an input selector button, Å or ı to

select the source component you want to

rename.

The selected component name appears in the display

window.

2 Press RE-NAME by using

a ballpoint pen or similar

object.

3 Press k / n to select and enter a character.

Pressing n changes the character in the following

order: A to Z, a to z, 0 to 9, space, - (hyphen) and /

(slash). (Pressing k goes in the reverse order.)

4 Press l / h to move the cursor to the next

position.

RE-NAME

ENTER

• If you continuously want to rename another source component,

press ENTER and repeat steps 1, 3 and 4.

5 Press RE-NAME again to exit from the

renaming mode.

MACRO

Clearing Learned Functions,

Macros, Renamed Source Names,

and Setup Manufacturer Codes

1 Press an input selector button, Å or ı to

select the source component you want to

clear the function, Macros, renamed source

names or manufacturer codes.

The selected component name appears in the display

window.

2 Press CLEAR by using a ballpoint pen or

similar object.

Note

• If you do not press any button within 30 seconds after step 2,

the clearing process is canceled. If this happen, start over from

step 1.

CLEAR

PHONO

DVD

VCR2/DVR

VCR 1

D-TV/LD

CBL/SAT

CD-R

MD/TAPE

TUNER

V-A UX

PHONO

DVD

VCR2/DVR

VCR 1

D-TV/LD

CBL/SAT

CD-R

MD/TAPE

TUNER

V-A UX

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

3 Press k / n to select the clear mode.

The mode is shown in the display window in the

following order:

4 Press and hold CLEAR again for about 3

seconds.

“C:OK” appears in the display window.

Note

•“C:NG” appears in the display window if the operation is

unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 2.

5 Press CLEAR to exit from the clearing mode.

Once you have cleared a learned function or macro

for a button, the button reverts to the factory setting.

Note

•“ERROR” appears in the display window under the following

circumstances:

– when pressing a button other than the cursor and ENTER;

– when pressing more than one button at once; or

– when MACRO ON/OFF, 10KEY/DSP or PARAMETER/SET

MENU is switched to another position.

CLEAR

Clearing a Learned Function or

Macro

You can clear the function learned in a certain

programmable button in each area.

■ To clear a learned function

1 Press an input selector button, Å or ı to

select the source component you want to

clear the function.

The selected component name appears in the display

window.

2 Press LEARN by using a ballpoint pen or

similar object.

“LEARN” and the selected component name appear

alternately in the display window.

Note

• If you do not press any button within 30 seconds after step 2,

the clearing process is canceled. If this happens, start over from

step 2.

3 Press the button that you want to clear for 3

seconds as pressing CLEAR by using a

ballpoint pen or similar object.

“C:OK” appears in the display window.

4 Press LEARN again to exit

from the learning mode.

■ To clear the macro function

1 Press an input selector button, Å or ı to

select the source component for which you

want to clear the function.

The selected component name appears in the display

window.

LEARN

CLEAR

Clears all programmed functions

including setup manufacturer

codes. This returns to the

factory settings.

(L: name of a component) Clears

all learned functions for the

component area. Press the input

selector button, Å or ı to select

the component.

Clears all learned functions for

this unit control area.

Clears all learned functions.

Clears all programmed macros.

Clears all renamed source

names in the display window.

LEARN

PHONO

DVD

VCR2/DVR

VCR 1

D-TV/LD

CBL/SAT

CD-R

MD/TAPE

TUNER

V-A UX

PHONO

DVD

VCR2/DVR

VCR 1

D-TV/LD

CBL/SAT

CD-R

MD/TAPE

TUNER

V-A UX

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

Pressing n always selects OPTN first

SELECT

SOURCE

■ SOURCE SELECT k / n

You can control another component independently from

the input you have selected by pressing an input selector

button.

Press SOURCE SELECT k / n to choose the

component and set the remote control to be

used for it.

The display window will show one of the following:

(when pressing n) OPTN (option), Å, ı, PHONO,

V-AUX, TUNER, MD, CD-R, CD, TV/LD (TV or

digital TV/LD), CBSAT (cable TV/satellite tuner),

VCR 1, VCR 2, DVD.

• Pressing k shows the same in the reverse order, but you cannot

select OPTN.

■ OPTN (option) area

OPTN is an extra component control area that can be

programmed with other remote control functions.

Note

• You cannot set up the manufacturer code in this area. See

page 38 for the programming procedure.

2 Press MACRO to clear a programmed macro

by using a ballpoint pen or similar object.

3 Press and hold CLEAR by using a ballpoint

pen or similar object, and at the same time

press the button for which you want to clear

the macro for about 3 seconds.

“C:OK” appears in the display window.

• You can clear other learned functions and macros at this time

by holding down CLEAR again and pressing the other buttons

for which those learned functions or macros have been

programmed.

Note

•“C:NG” appears in the display window if the operation is

unsuccessful. In this case, try step 3 again.

4 Press MACRO again to exit from the clearing

mode.

Once you have cleared a learned function or macro

for a button, the button reverts to the factory setting.

MACRO

CLEAR

6CH INPUT

SOUND

TITLE

CHAPTER

PAUSESTOPPOWER

REC

SELECT

DISPLAY

SOURCE

PLAY

– +

ENTER

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

Each Component Control Area

The general operational buttons are shown for each area. Some of them may not function depending on the component

you have. After setting the manufacturer code, press an input selector button, Å / ı, or SOURCE SELECT k / n to

select a component you want to control.

■ Operating a DVD player (DVD area)

STANDBY

6CH INPUT

SOUND

SYSTEM

PHONO

DVD

VCR2/DVR

VCR 1

TITLE

CHAPTER

PAUSESTOPPOWER

REC

HALL 1

6.1/ES

DSP

10KEY

ROCK

CONCERT

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MUTE

VOLUME

STEREO

TV INPUT

TV VOL

PRESET

DISC

EFFECT

TV MUTE

CONCERT

VIDEO

ENTER-

TAINMENT

HALL 2

CHURCH

JAZZ CLUB

SELECT

/DTS

SUR.

CHP/INDEX

A/B/C/D/E

SELECT

DISPLAY

SOURCE

PLAY

– +

ENTER

D-TV/LD

CBL/SAT

CD-R

MD/TAPE

TUNER

V-AUX

POWER

100

11 12

234

THEATER

STANDBY

6CH INPUT

SOUND

SYSTEM

PHONO

DVD

VCR2/DVR

VCR 1

TITLE

CHAPTER

PAU S ESTOPPOWER

REC

HALL 1

6.1/ES

DSP

10KEY

ROCK

CONCERT

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MUTE

VOLUME

STEREO

TV INPUT

TV VOL

PRESET

DISC

EFFECT

TV MUTE

CONCERT

VIDEO

THEATER

ENTER-

TAINMENT

HALL 2

CHURCH

JAZZ CLUB

SELECT

/DTS

SUR.

CHP/INDEX

A/B/C/D/E

SELECT

DISPLAY

SOURCE

PLAY

– +

ENTER

D-TV/LD

CBL/SAT

CD-R

MD/TAPE

TUNER

V-AUX

POWER

100

11 12

234

* TV VOL +/–, TV INPUT, and TV MUTE function to operate your TV without switching the input if the

manufacturer code is set in D-TV/LD or PHONO. When the manufacturer code for your TV is set up in the both D-

TV/LD and PHONO areas, priority is given to the signal in the D-TV/LD area.

■ Operating a VCR (VCR 1 and VCR 2/DVR areas)

* TV VOL +/–, TV INPUT, and TV MUTE function to operate your TV without switching the input if the

manufacturer code is set in D-TV/LD or PHONO. When the manufacturer code for your TV is set up in the both D-

TV/LD and PHONO areas, priority is given to the signal in the D-TV/LD area.

DISPLAY

DISC +/– (disc skip)

STOP

Title/Index

TITLE

Return

POWER

Menu cursor/ENTER

Audio

Skip

PLAY

PAUSE

Numeric buttons

Clear

CH +/– (channel)

POWER

Record

(Press twice to start recording)

TV/Video input

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

Numeric buttons

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

STANDBY

6CH INPUT

SOUND

SYSTEM

PHONO

DVD

VCR2/DVR

VCR 1

TITLE

CHAPTER

PAUSESTOPPOWER

REC

HALL 1

6.1/ES

DSP

10KEY

ROCK

CONCERT

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MUTE

VOLUME

STEREO

TV INPUT

TV VOL

PRESET

DISC

EFFECT

TV MUTE

ENTER-

TAINMENT

HALL 2

CHURCH

JAZZ CLUB

SELECT

/DTS

SUR.

CHP/INDEX

A/B/C/D/E

SELECT

DISPLAY

SOURCE

PLAY

– +

ENTER

D-TV/LD

CBL/SAT

CD-R

MD/TAPE

TUNER

V-AUX

POWER

100

11 12

234

CONCERT

VIDEO

THEATER

STANDBY

6CH INPUT

SOUND

SYSTEM

PHONO

DVD

VCR2/DVR

VCR 1

TITLE

CHAPTER

PAUSESTOPPOWER

REC

HALL 1

6.1/ES

DSP

10KEY

ROCK

CONCERT

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MUTE

VOLUME

STEREO

TV INPUT

TV VOL

PRESET

DISC

EFFECT

TV MUTE

ENTER-

TAINMENT

HALL 2

CHURCH

JAZZ CLUB

SELECT

/DTS

SUR.

CHP/INDEX

A/B/C/D/E

SELECT

DISPLAY

SOURCE

PLAY

– +

ENTER

D-TV/LD

CBL/SAT

CD-R

MD/TAPE

TUNER

V-AUX

POWER

100

11 12

234

CONCERT

VIDEO

THEATER

■ Operating a TV/digital TV (D-TV/LD area) or a cable TV/satellite TV (CBL/

SAT area)

Set the manufacture code for your LD player following the setting procedure described on page 38 because TV is

factory-set for this input selector button.

* TV VOL +/–, TV INPUT, and TV MUTE function to operate your TV without switching the input if the

manufacturer code is set in PHONO.

* SEARCH, REC, STOP, PAUSE and PLAY function to operate your VCR without switching the input to VCR 1 if the

manufacturer code is set in VCR 1.

■ Operating an LD player (D-TV/LD area)

CH +/– (channel)

DISPLAY

POWER

Enter

TV INPUT

TV VOL +/–

TV MUTE

Numeric buttons

Clear

DISPLAY

POWER

STOP

Chapter/Time

SOUND

CHAPTER –/+ (chapter search)

PLAY

PAUSE

Numeric buttons

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

STANDBY

6CH INPUT

SOUND

SYSTEM

PHONO

DVD

VCR2/DVR

VCR 1

TITLE

CHAPTER

PAUSESTOPPOWER

REC

HALL 1

6.1/ES

DSP

10KEY

ROCK

CONCERT

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MUTE

VOLUME

STEREO

TV INPUT

TV VOL

PRESET

DISC

EFFECT

TV MUTE

ENTER-

TAINMENT

HALL 2

CHURCH

JAZZ CLUB

SELECT

/DTS

SUR.

CHP/INDEX

A/B/C/D/E

SELECT

DISPLAY

SOURCE

PLAY

– +

ENTER

D-TV/LD

CBL/SAT

CD-R

MD/TAPE

TUNER

V-AUX

POWER

100

11 12

234

CONCERT

VIDEO

THEATER

■ Operating a CD player (CD area)

STANDBY

6CH INPUT

SOUND

SYSTEM

PHONO

DVD

VCR2/DVR

VCR 1

TITLE

CHAPTER

PAUSESTOPPOWER

REC

HALL 1

6.1/ES

DSP

10KEY

ROCK

CONCERT

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MUTE

VOLUME

STEREO

TV INPUT

TV VOL

PRESET

DISC

EFFECT

TV MUTE

ENTER-

TAINMENT

HALL 2

CHURCH

JAZZ CLUB

SELECT

/DTS

SUR.

CHP/INDEX

A/B/C/D/E

SELECT

DISPLAY

SOURCE

PLAY

– +

ENTER

D-TV/LD

CBL/SAT

CD-R

MD/TAPE

TUNER

V-AUX

POWER

100

11 12

234

CONCERT

VIDEO

THEATER

* TV VOL +/–, TV INPUT, and TV MUTE function to operate your TV without switching the input if the

manufacturer code is set in D-TV/LD or PHONO. When the manufacturer code for your TV is set up in the both D-

TV/LD and PHONO areas, priority is given to the signal in the D-TV/LD area.

■ Operating a CD recorder (CD-R area) or an MD recorder (MD/TAPE area)

* TV VOL +/–, TV INPUT, and TV MUTE function to operate your TV without switching the input if the

manufacturer code is set in D-TV/LD or PHONO. When the manufacturer code for your TV is set up in the both D-

TV/LD and PHONO areas, priority is given to the signal in the D-TV/LD area.

DISC +/– (disc skip)

DISPLAY

POWER

STOP

INDEX

Skip

PLAY

PAUSE

Numeric buttons

Clear

DISPLAY

POWER

STOP

INDEX

(CD-R only)

Skip

PLAY

PAUSE

Numeric buttons

Clear

(CD-R only)

Record

(MD only)

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

■ Operating a tape deck (MD/TAPE area)

STANDBY

6CH INPUT

SOUND

SYSTEM

PHONO

DVD

VCR2/DVR

VCR 1

TITLE

CHAPTER

PAUSESTOPPOWER

REC

HALL 1

6.1/ES

DSP

10KEY

ROCK

CONCERT

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MUTE

VOLUME

STEREO

TV INPUT

TV VOL

PRESET

DISC

EFFECT

TV MUTE

ENTER-

TAINMENT

HALL 2

CHURCH

JAZZ CLUB

SELECT

/DTS

SUR.

CHP/INDEX

A/B/C/D/E

SELECT

DISPLAY

SOURCE

PLAY

– +

ENTER

D-TV/LD

CBL/SAT

CD-R

MD/TAPE

TUNER

V-AUX

POWER

100

11 12

234

CONCERT

VIDEO

THEATER

* TV VOL +/–, TV INPUT, and TV MUTE function to operate your TV without switching the input if the

manufacturer code is set in D-TV/LD or PHONO. When the manufacturer code for your TV is set up in the both D-

TV/LD and PHONO areas, priority is given to the signal in the D-TV/LD area.

■ Operating a tuner (TUNER area)

(backward/forward)

Record

STOP

INDEX

(MD only)

A/B

Direction A/B

PLAY

PAUSE

Numeric button

(MD only)

Display

POWER

STANDBY

6CH INPUT

SOUND

SYSTEM

PHONO

DVD

VCR2/DVR

VCR 1

TITLE

CHAPTER

PAUSESTOPPOWER

REC

HALL 1

6.1/ES

DSP

10KEY

ROCK

CONCERT

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MUTE

VOLUME

STEREO

TV INPUT

TV VOL

PRESET

DISC

EFFECT

TV MUTE

ENTER-

TAINMENT

HALL 2

CHURCH

JAZZ CLUB

SELECT

/DTS

SUR.

CHP/INDEX

A/B/C/D/E

SELECT

DISPLAY

SOURCE

PLAY

– +

ENTER

D-TV/LD

CBL/SAT

CD-R

MD/TAPE

TUNER

V-AUX

POWER

100

11 12

234

CONCERT

VIDEO

THEATER

POWER

Preset group A/B/C/D/E

Preset number 1 to 8 *

PRESET +/–

* These buttons function when the manufacturer code “Yama2” is set up.

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

■ Operating the component set in

Å or ı

These buttons are not input selector buttons but simply provide the space for an extra component to control with this

unit’s remote control without making connection to this unit. The white buttons area shown below can be used for the

component set in Å and ı, and the function for each button differs depending on the component.

YAMAHA LD player is factory-set in Å and satellite tuner in ı. However if you want to set other component, set the

manufacturer code for the component you want to set in the Å / ı button following the manufacturer code setting

procedure described on page 38.

STANDBY

6CH INPUT

SOUND

SYSTEM

PHONO

DVD

VCR2/DVR

VCR 1

TITLE

CHAPTER

PAUSESTOPPOWER

REC

HALL 1

6.1/ES

DSP

10KEY

ROCK

CONCERT

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MUTE

VOLUME

STEREO

TV INPUT

TV VOL

PRESET

DISC

EFFECT

TV MUTE

ENTER-

TAINMENT

HALL 2

CHURCH

JAZZ CLUB

SELECT

/DTS

SUR.

CHP/INDEX

A/B/C/D/E

SELECT

DISPLAY

SOURCE

PLAY

– +

ENTER

D-TV/LD

CBL/SAT

CD-R

MD/TAPE

TUNER

V-AUX

POWER

100

11 12

234

CONCERT

VIDEO

THEATER

The functions of these buttons in the

component control area differ for the

component you set in Å or ı.

Adjusting the Items on the SET

Adjustment should be made with the remote control.

Note

• Some items require extra steps to change to the desired setting.

1 Set PARAMETER/SET

MENU to SET MENU.

2 Press k / n repeatedly to select the item (1 to

14) you want to adjust.

3 Press –/+ once to enter the setup mode of

the selected item.

The last setting you adjusted appears on the video

monitor or on the front panel display.

Depending on the item, press k / n to select a sub

item.

2 LOW FRQ TEST

≥ OUTPUT…MAIN L/R

FRQ……………………88Hz

TEST TONE………OFF

PARAMETER

SET MENU

ADVANCED OPERATION

HALL 1

6.1/ES

DSP

10KEY

ROCK

CONCERT

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MUTE

VOLUME

STEREO

TV INPUT

TV VOL

PRESET

DISC

PARAMETER

SET MENU

EFFECT

LEVEL

ON SCREEN

TESTSLEEP

TV MUTE

CONCERT

VIDEO

THEATER

ENTER-

TAINMENT

HALL 2

CHURCH

JAZZ CLUB

SELECT

/DTS

SUR.

CHP/INDEX

A/B/C/D/E

100

11 12

234

2,3,5

3,4

The SET MENU consists of 14 items including the

speaker mode setting, center graphic equalizer and

parameter initialization features. Choose the appropriate

item and adjust or select the values as necessary.

• You can adjust the items on the SET MENU while playing a

source.

• We recommend that you adjust the items on the SET MENU

while using a video monitor. It is easier to see the video

monitor than it is to see the front panel display on this unit

while adjusting the items.

Note

• The indication on the front panel display is the abbreviation of

the OSD.

1 SPEAKER SET

1A CENTER SP

1B MAIN SP

1C REAR L/R SP

1D REAR CT SP

1E LFE/BASS OUT

1F MAIN LEVEL

2 LOW FRQ TEST

3 L/R BALANCE

4 HP TONE CTRL

5 CENTER GEQ

6 INPUT RENAME

7 I/O ASSIGNMENT

7A CMPNT-V INPUT

7B OPTICAL OUT

7C OPTICAL IN

7D COAXIAL IN

8 INPUT MODE

9 PARAM. INI

10 LFE LEVEL

11 D-RANGE

12 SP DELAY TIME

13 DISPLAY SET

14 MEMORY GUARD

2 LOW FRQ TEST

OUTPUT…MAIN L/R

FRQ……………………88Hz

≥ TEST TONE………OFF

SET MENU 1/4

≥ 2 LOW FRQ TEST

3 L/R BALANCE

4 HP TONE CTRL

/ : Up/Down

-/+ : Enter

1 SPEAKER SET

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

SET MENU

LRG SML NONE

1A CENTER SP

4 Press –/+ repeatedly to change the setting of

the item.

5 Press k / n repeatedly until the current DSP

program appears or simply press one of the

DSP program group buttons to exit from the

SET MENU.

Memory back-up

The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data

from being lost even if this unit is in the standby

mode. However if the power cord is disconnected from

the AC outlet, or the power supply is cut for more than

one week, the stored data will be lost. If so, adjust the

items again.

2 LOW FRQ TEST

OUTPUT…MAIN L/R

FRQ……………………88Hz

≥ TEST TONE…………ON

LRG SML NONE

1A CENTER SP

LRG SML NONE

1A CENTER SP

HALL 1

DSP

10KEY

ROCK

CONCERT

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

CONCERT

VIDEO

THEATER

ENTER-

TAINMENT

HALL 2

CHURCH

JAZZ CLUB

SELECT

/DTS

SUR.

100

11 12

234

1 SPEAKER SET (speaker mode

settings)

Use this feature to select suitable output modes for your

speaker configuration.

Notes

• When 96-kHz sampling digital signals are input to this unit,

level adjustments in items 1B,1E and 1F are possible, but those

in items 1A,1C and 1D are not affected.

• When 6CH INPUT is selected as the input source, level

adjustments in items 1A through 1E are not affected.

■ 1A CENTER SP (center speaker

mode)

By adding a center speaker to your speaker configuration,

this unit can provide good dialog localization for many

listeners and superior synchronization of sound and

images. The OSD shows a large, small or no center

speaker depending on how you set this item.

Choices: LRG (large), SML (small), NONE

Initial setting: LRG

LRG

Select this if you have a large center speaker. The entire

range of the center channel signal is directed to the center

speaker.

SML

Select this if you have a small center speaker. The low-

frequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the center

channel are directed to the speakers selected with “1E

LFE/BASS OUT”.

NONE

Select this if you do not have a center speaker. All of the

center channel signal are directed to the left and right

main speakers.

SET MENU

LARGE SMALL

1B MAIN SP

LRG SML NONE

1C REAR L/R SP

LRG SML NONE

1C REAR L/R SP

LRG SML NONE

1C REAR L/R SP

LARGE SMALL

1B MAIN SP

■ 1B MAIN SP (main speaker mode)

The OSD shows large or small main speakers depending

on how you set this item.

Choices: LARGE, SMALL

Initial setting: LARGE

LARGE

Select this if you have large main speakers. The entire

range of the left and right main channel signal is directed

to the left and right main speakers.

SMALL

Select this if you have small main speakers. The low-

frequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the main channel

are directed to the speakers selected with “1E LFE/BASS

OUT”.

Note

• When you select MAIN for “1E LFE/BASS OUT”, the low-

frequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the main channel are

directed to the main speakers even if you select SMALL for the

main speaker mode.

■ 1C REAR L/R SP (rear speaker

mode)

The OSD shows large, small or no rear speakers

depending on how you set this item.

Choices: LRG (large), SML (small), NONE

Initial setting: LRG

LRG

Select this if you have large left and right rear speakers or

if a rear subwoofer is connected to the rear speakers. The

entire range of the rear channel signal is directed to the

left and right rear speakers.

SML

Select this if you have small left and right rear speakers.

The low-frequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the rear

channel are directed to the speakers selected with “1E

LFE/BASS OUT”.

NONE

Select this if you do not have rear speakers.

• This unit is set in the virtual CINEMA DSP mode by selecting

NONE for “1C REAR L/R SP”.

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

SET MENU

■ 1D REAR CT SP (rear center

speaker mode)

By adding a rear center speaker to your speaker

configuration, this unit can provide more realistic front-

to-back and transitions.

Choices: LRG (large), SML (small), NONE

Initial setting: LRG

LRG

Select this if you have a large rear center speaker. The

entire range of the rear center channel signal is directed to

the rear center speaker.

SML

Select this if you have a small rear center speaker. The

low-frequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the rear

center channel are directed to the speakers selected with

“1E LFE/BASS OUT”.

NONE

Select this if you do not have a rear center speaker. All of

the rear center channel signal are directed to the left and

right rear speakers.

■ 1E LFE/BASS OUT (bass out

mode)

LFE signals carry low-frequency effects when this unit

decodes a Dolby Digital or DTS signal. Low-frequency

signals are defined as 90 Hz and below. The Low-

frequency signals are directed to both main right and left

speakers, and the subwoofer (subwoofer can be used for

both stereo reproduction and the DSP program).

Choices: SWFR (subwoofer), MAIN, BOTH

Initial setting: BOTH

SWFR

Select this if you use a subwoofer. The LFE signals are

directed to the subwoofer.

MAIN

Select this if you do not use a subwoofer. The LFE signals

are directed to the main speakers.

BOTH

Select this if you use a subwoofer and you want to mix

the main channel low-frequency signals with the LFE

signals.

Note

• The low-frequency signals (90 Hz and below) from all main,

center, rear and rear center channels are directed to the LFE

channel when you select the small speaker setting in items 1A,

1B, 1C and 1D.

SWFR MAIN BOTH

1E LFE/BASS OUT

SWFR MAIN BOTH

1E LFE/BASS OUT

SWFR MAIN BOTH

1E LFE/BASS OUT

LRG SML NONE

1D REAR CT SP

LRG SML NONE

1D REAR CT SP

LRG SML NONE

1D REAR CT SP

SET MENU

Normal -10dB

1F MAIN LEVEL

Normal -10dB

1F MAIN LEVEL

2 LOW FRQ TEST

Use this feature to adjust the output level of the

subwoofer so it matches that of the other speakers in your

configuration. Change the setting with the remote control

while sitting in the listening position.

1 Press –/+ to set “TEST TONE” to ON, and

adjust the volume with VOLUME +/– so you

can hear the tone.

Notes

• Do not turn up the volume too high.

• If no test tone is heard, turn down the volume, set this unit in

the standby mode and make sure all the necessary connections

are correct.

2 Press n to go to “OUTPUT” and press –/+ to

select the speaker you want to compare with

the subwoofer.

If SWFR is selected, the test tone above 90 Hz will

not be output from the subwoofer. The test tone will

not necessarily be output from the selected speakers.

The output mode of the test tone depends on the

settings of “1 SPEAKER SET” on the SET MENU.

3 Press n to go to “FRQ” and press –/+ to

select the frequency you want to use.

■ 1F MAIN LEVEL (main level

mode)

Change this setting if you cannot match the output level

of the center, rear (L/R) and rear center speakers with the

main speakers because of the unusually high-efficiency

performance of the main speakers.

Choices: Normal, –10 dB

Initial setting: Normal

Normal

Select this if you can match the output level of your effect

speakers with that of your main speakers when using the

test tone.

–10 dB

Select this if you cannot match the output level of your

effect speakers with that of your main speakers when

using the test tone.

2 LOW FRQ TEST

OUTPUT…MAIN L/R

FRQ……………………88Hz

≥ TEST TONE…………ON

2 LOW FRQ TEST

≥ OUTPUT…MAIN L/R

FRQ……………………88Hz

TEST TONE………OFF

2 LOW FRQ TEST

OUTPUT…MAIN L/R

≥ FRQ……………………88Hz

TEST TONE………OFF

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

SET MENU

5 CENTER GEQ

≥ 300Hz

1kHz

3kHz

10kHz

+3dB

100Hz

4 HP TONE CTRL (headphone tone

control)

Use this feature to adjust the level of the bass and treble

when you use your headphones.

Control range (dB): –6 to +3 for both BASS and TRBL

(treble)

Initial setting: 0 dB for both BASS and TRBL (treble)

5 CENTER GEQ (center graphic

equalizer)

Use this feature to adjust the built-in 5-band graphic

equalizer so that the center speaker tonal quality matches

that of the left and right main speakers. You can select the

100 Hz, 300 Hz, 1 kHz, 3 kHz, or 10 kHz frequencies.

Control range (dB): –6 to +6

Initial setting: 0 dB for 5-band

1 Press n to select a higher frequency and k

to select a lower frequency.

2 Press –/+ to adjust the level of that

frequency.

• You can monitor the center speaker sound while adjusting this

item by using the test tone. Press TEST before starting the

foregoing procedure. “TEST DOLBY SUR.” appears on the

video monitor, and the test tone starts alternating among the

speakers. Once you begin this procedure, the test tone remains

at the center speaker and you can hear how the sound changes

as you adjust the various frequency levels. To stop the test tone,

press TEST (see pages 22 and 23).

3 L/R BALANCE

-/+ : Adjust

/ : Exit

…………………… ……………………

4 HP TONE CTRL

TRBL

0dB

≥ BASS

5 CENTER GEQ

300Hz

1kHz

3kHz

10kHz

0dB

≥ 100Hz

4 Adjust the volume of the subwoofer with the

controls on the subwoofer so it matches that

of the speaker you are comparing it to.

■ About the test tone

The test tone is produced by the tone generator.

The tone generator produces a narrow-band noise

centered on a specified frequency by the band pass filter.

You can change this center frequency from 35 Hz through

250 Hz in one-sixth octave steps.

You can use the test tone not only for adjusting the

subwoofer level, but also for checking the low-frequency

characteristics of your listening room. Low-frequency

sounds are especially affected by the listener’s position,

speaker placement, subwoofer polarity and other

conditions.

Digital generator

(wide band noise produced)

Band pass filter

35 Hz – 250 HzCenter freq.

Freq.

Noise

3 L/R BALANCE (balance of the

left and right main speakers)

Use this feature to adjust the balance of the output level

from the left and right main speakers.

Control range: 10 steps for L/R

Initial setting: 0 dB for L/R

Press + to decrease the output level for the

left main speaker. Press – for the right main

speaker.

SET MENU

6 INPUT RENAME

Use this feature to change the name of the input which

appears on the OSD or the front panel display.

1 Press an input selector button (or use INPUT

l / h) to select the input you want to

change the name of.

2 Press –/+ to place the _ (under-bar) under

the space or the character you want to edit.

3 Press k / n to select the character you want

to use and –/+ to move to the next one.

• Press n to change the character in the following

order, or press k to go in the reverse order.

A to Z, a space, 0 to 9, a space, a to z, a space, #,

*, +, and so on.

• Follow the foregoing procedure to rename other

inputs.

Note

• You can use up to 8 characters to rename the inputs.

4 Press + repeatedly to exit from INPUT

RENAME.

6 INPUT RENAME

-/+ : Position

/ : Character

DVD ≥ DVD

6 INPUT RENAME

-/+ : Position

/ : Character

DVD ≥ DVD1

6 INPUT RENAME

-/+ : Position

/ : Character

DVD ≥ DVD

7A CMPNT-V INPUT

[B]……………D-TV/LD

≥ [A]…………… DVD

7B OPTICAL OUT

(2)…………… CD-R

≥ (1)……………MD/TAPE

7 I/O ASSIGNMENT

It is possible to assign jacks according to the component

to be used if this unit’s COMPONENT VIDEO input jack

or DIGITAL INPUT/OUTPUT jack settings (component

names for jacks) differ from that component. This makes

it possible to change the jack assignment and effectively

connect more component.

Once you assign, you can select that component with

INPUT l / h (the input selector buttons on the remote

control).

■ 7A CMPNT-V INPUT for

COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT jacks

[A] and [B]

Choices: [A] DVD, V-AUX, VCR 2/DVR, VCR 1,

CBL/SAT, D-TV/LD

[B] D-TV/LD, DVD, V-AUX, VCR 2/

DVR, VCR 1, CBL/SAT

Initial settings: [A] DVD

[B] D-TV/LD

■ 7B OPTICAL OUT for OPTICAL

OUTPUT jacks (1) and (2)

Choices: (1) MD/TAPE, CD-R, CD, PHONO,

V-AUX, VCR 2/DVR, VCR 1, CBL/

SAT, D-TV/LD, DVD, TUNER

(2) CD-R, CD, PHONO, V-AUX, VCR 2/

DVR, VCR 1, CBL/SAT, D-TV/LD,

DVD, MD/TAPE, TUNER

Initial settings: (1) MD/TAPE

(2) CD-R

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

SET MENU

8 INPUT MODE (initial input

mode)

Use this feature to designate the input mode for sources

connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn

on this unit (see page 26 for details about the input

mode).

Choices: AUTO, LAST

Initial setting: AUTO

AUTO

Select this to allow this unit to automatically detect the

type of input signal and select the appropriate input mode.

LAST

Select this to set this unit to automatically select the last

input mode used for that source.

■ 7C OPTICAL IN for OPTICAL

INPUT jacks (3) to (6)

Choices: (3) CD, PHONO, VCR 2/DVR, VCR 1,

CBL/SAT, D-TV/LD, DVD, MD/

TAPE, CD-R, TUNER

(4) CD-R, CD, PHONO, VCR 2/DVR,

VCR 1, CBL/SAT, D-TV/LD, DVD,

MD/TAPE, TUNER

(5) DVD, MD/TAPE, CD-R, CD,

PHONO, VCR 2/DVR, VCR 1, CBL/

SAT, D-TV/LD, TUNER

(6) D-TV/LD, DVD, MD/TAPE, CD-R,

CD, PHONO, VCR 2/DVR, VCR 1,

CBL/SAT, TUNER

Initial settings: (3) CD

(4) CD-R

(5) DVD

(6) D-TV/LD

■ 7D COAXIAL IN for COAXIAL

INPUT jacks (7) and (8)

Choices: (7) CD, PHONO, V-AUX, VCR 2/DVR,

VCR 1, CBL/SAT, D-TV/LD, DVD,

MD/TAPE, CD-R, TUNER

(8) CBL/SAT, D-TV/LD, DVD, MD/

TAPE, CD-R, CD, PHONO, V-AUX,

VCR 2/DVR, VCR 1, TUNER

Initial settings: (7) CD

(8) CBL/SAT

Note

• You cannot select an item more than once for the same type of

jack.

7D COAXIAL IN

≥ (8)………CBL/SAT

(7)…………… CD

8 INPUT MODE

-/+ : Select

/ : Exit

AUTO LAST

7C OPTICAL IN

(4)…………… CD-R

≥ (5)…………… DVD

(6)……………D-TV/LD

(3)…………… CD

SET MENU

9 PARAM. INI (parameter

initialization)

Use this feature to initialize the parameters for each DSP

program within a DSP program group. When you

initialize a DSP program group, all of the parameter

values within that group revert to their initial settings.

Press the corresponding numeric button for

the DSP program that you want to initialize.

The asterisk (*) next to the program number means

that the parameter values have been changed.

Notes

• You cannot initialize the individual DSP programs within a

group separately.

• The parameter values of the DSP programs do not change if

you initialize a program group that does not have the asterisk

mark (*).

• When “14 MEMORY GUARD” is set to ON (see page 60),

you cannot initialize any program groups.

• Once you initialize a DSP program group, you cannot

automatically revert to the previous parameter settings.

10 LFE LEVEL

This setting is effective only when this unit decodes

Dolby Digital or DTS signals.

Use this feature to adjust the output level of the LFE

(low-frequency effect) channel when playing back a

Dolby Digital or DTS signal. The LFE signal carries the

low-frequency special effect sound which is only added to

certain scenes.

Control range (dB): –20 to 0 for both SPEAKER and

HEADPHONE

Initial setting: 0 dB for both SPEAKER and

HEADPHONE

1 Press k / n to select the item to be adjusted.

2 Press –/+ to adjust the LFE level.

Note

• Adjust the LFE level according to the capacity of your

subwoofer or headphones.

9 PARAM. INI

* 5 678

9 *10 11

Press No. Key

1 23*4

10 LFE LEVEL

HEADPHONE…………0dB

≥ SPEAKER………………0dB

10 LFE LEVEL

HEADPHONE…………0dB

≥ SPEAKER…………-11dB

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

SET MENU

12 SP DELAY TIME

Use this feature to adjust the delay of the Center and the

Rear Center channel sounds. This feature works when this

unit decodes DTS or Dolby Digital signals. Ideally, the

Center speaker and the Rear Center speaker should be the

same distance from the main listening position as the left

and right Main speakers. However, in most home

situations, the Center speaker or the Rear Center speaker

is placed in line with the Main speakers or the Rear

speakers. By delaying the sound from the Center speaker

and the Rear Center speaker, the apparent distance from

the Center speaker and the Rear Center speaker to the

main listening position can be adjusted to make it seem

the same as the distance between the left and right Main

speaker, and the left and right Rear speakers to the

listening position. Adjusting the delay time for the Center

speaker is especially important for giving depth to the

dialogue.

Control range: 0 to 5 ms for CENTER

0 to 30 ms for REAR CENTER

Initial setting: 0 ms for CENTER

3 ms for REAR CENTER

Press –/+ to increase or decrease the delay

of the center and the rear center channel

sounds.

Center speaker image

• Increasing the delay by 1 ms simulates moving the speakers

about 30 cm (one foot) farther away from the listening position.

11 D-RANGE (dynamic range)

Use this feature to adjust the dynamic range. This setting

is effective only when this unit decodes Dolby Digital

signals.

MAX

Select the “MAX” setting for feature films.

STD

Select the “STD” (Standard) setting for general use.

MIN

Select the “MIN” setting for listening to sources at

extremely low volume levels.

11 D-RANGE

HP: MAX STD MIN

≥ SP: MAX STD MIN

12 SP DELAY TIME

REAR CNTR…………3ms

≥ CENTER…………………0ms

SET MENU

13 DISPLAY SET

■ BLUE BACK

Selecting AUTO for the on-screen display setting displays

a blue background when there’s no video signal input.

Nothing is displayed on the screen including the on-

screen display if OFF is selected.

Choices: AUTO, OFF

Initial setting: AUTO

■ OSD SHIFT (OSD off-set position)

This setting is used to adjust the vertical position of the

OSD.

Control range: +5 (downward) to –5 (upward)

Initial setting: 0

Press + to lower the position of the OSD.

Press – to raise the position of the OSD.

■ DIMMER

You can adjust the brightness of the front panel display.

Control range: –4 to 0

Initial setting: 0

14 MEMORY GUARD

Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to DSP

program parameter values and other settings on this unit.

Choices: ON, OFF

Initial setting: OFF

Select ON to protect the following features:

• DSP program parameters

• All SET MENU items

• Center, rear speakers, rear center, and subwoofer levels

• The on-screen display (OSD) mode

Notes

• When “14 MEMORY GUARD” is set to ON, you cannot use

the test tone.

• When “14 MEMORY GUARD” is set to ON, you cannot select

any other SET MENU items.

13 DISPLAY SET

OSD SHIFT………………0

DIMMER………………………0

≥ BLUE BACK………AUTO

14 MEMORY GUARD

-/+ : Select

/ : Exit

OFF ON

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

3 Press –/+ to adjust the speaker output level.

• The control range for the center, left and right rear

or rear center speakers is from +10 dB to –10 dB.

• The control range for the subwoofer is from 0 dB

to –20 dB.

• When PARAMETER/SET MENU is set to SET MENU, you

cannot adjust the output level by using LEVEL. However, each

time you press LEVEL, the current level of each speaker

appears on the front panel display and you can check the

speaker level.

Notes

• When the speaker output modes for “1A CENTER SP” and

“1C REAR L/R SP” are set to NONE, and “1E LFE/BASS

OUT” to MAIN, the output level of those speakers cannot be

adjusted because there is no sound coming from these speakers.

• When you adjust the output level with LEVEL, the settings you

made with the test tone will be changed.

• It is recommended to adjust the speakers (except for a

subwoofer) by following the steps described in Using the Test

Tone on pages 22 and 23.

Memory back-up

The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data

from being lost even if this unit is in the standby

mode. However if the power cord is disconnected from

the AC outlet, or the power supply is cut for more than

one week, the stored data will be lost. If so, set the

output level again.

You can adjust the output level of each effect speaker

(center, left and right rear, rear center and subwoofer)

while listening to a music source.

Adjustment should be made with the remote control.

1 Set PARAMETER/SET

MENU to PARAMETER.

2 Press LEVEL repeatedly to select the

speaker(s) you want to adjust.

Each time you press LEVEL, the selected speaker

changes and appears on the front panel display as

follows: center, right rear, rear center, left rear and

subwoofer.

LEVEL

PARAMETER

SET MENU

MUTE

VOLUME

STEREO

TV INPUT

TV VOL

PRESET

DISC

PARAMETER

SET MENU

EFFECT

LEVEL

ON SCREEN

TESTSLEEP

TV MUTE

A/B/C/D/E

LEVEL

ADJUSTING THE LEVEL OF THE EFFECT SPEAKERS

• Once you press LEVEL, you can also select the speaker(s) to

be adjusted by pressing n/k.

Center speaker output level

Subwoofer output level

Left rear speaker output

level

Rear center speaker output

level

Right rear speaker output

level

3 The “SLEEP” indicator soon lights up on the

front panel display after the sleep timer has

been set.

The display then returns to the previous indication.

Canceling the Sleep Timer

Press SLEEP repeatedly until “SLEEP OFF”

appears on the front panel display.

After a few seconds, “SLEEP OFF” disappears, the

“SLEEP” indicator goes off and the display returns

to the previous indication.

• The sleep timer setting can also be canceled by setting this unit

in the standby mode by using STANDBY on the remote control

(or STANDBY/ON on the front panel) or by disconnecting the

AC power cord from the AC outlet.

Use this feature to automatically set this unit in the

standby mode after the amount of time you have set. The

sleep timer is useful when you are going to sleep while

this unit is playing or recording a source. The sleep timer

also automatically turns off the external components

connected to AC OUTLETS.

The sleep timer can only be set with the remote control.

• By connecting a commercially available timer to this unit, you

can also set a wake-up timer. Refer to the operation instructions

for the timer.

Setting the Sleep Timer

1 Select a source and start playback on the

source component.

2 Press SLEEP repeatedly

to set the amount of time

before this unit

automatically turns off.

Each time you press SLEEP, the front panel display

changes as shown below.

PHONO

DVD

VCR2/DVR

VCR 1

D-TV/LD

CBL/SAT

CD-R

MD/TAPE

TUNER

V-A UX

SLEEP

HALL 1

6.1/ES

DSP

10KEY

ROCK

CONCERT

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MUTE

VOLUME

STEREO

TV INPUT

TV VOL

PRESET

DISC

PARAMETER

SET MENU

EFFECT

LEVEL

ON SCREEN

TESTSLEEP

TV MUTE

CONCERT

VIDEO

THEATER

ENTER-

TAINMENT

HALL 2

CHURCH

JAZZ CLUB

SELECT

/DTS

SUR.

CHP/INDEX

A/B/C/D/E

100

11 12

234

TRANSMIT

RE-NAME

STANDBY

6CH INPUT

SOUND

SYSTEM

CLEAR LEARN MACRO

OFF ON

MACRO

PHONO

DVD

VCR2/DVR

VCR 1

TITLE

CHAPTER

PAU SESTOPPOWER

REC

HALL 1

DSP

10KEY

HALL 2

CHURCH

JAZZ CLUB

SELECT

DISPLAY

SOURCE

PLAY

– +

ENTER

D-TV/LD

CBL/SAT

CD-R

MD/TAPE

TUNER

V-AU X

POWER

VCR DVD TUNER CD

PHONO

CD RV AUX

DSP

DIGITAL

VCR2/DVR

CBL

SAT

TAPE

VOLUME

SLEEP

SLEEP 120min

VCR DVD TUNER CD

PHONO

CD RV AUX

DSP

DIGITAL

VCR2/DVR

CBL

SAT

TAPE

VOLUME

SLEEP

CONCERT HALL1

SLEEP 120 min. SLEEP 90 min.

SLEEP 60 min.SLEEP 30 min.SLEEP OFF

SLEEP TIMER

SLEEP

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM PARAMETER EDITING

What is a sound field?

What really creates the rich, full tones of a live instrument

are the multiple reflections from the walls of the room. In

addition to making the sound “live”, these reflections

enable us to tell where the player is situated, and the size

and shape of the room in which we are sitting.

■ Elements of a sound field

In any environment, in addition to the direct sound

coming straight to our ears from the player’s instrument,

there are two distinct types of sound reflections that

combine to make up the sound field:

Early reflections

Reflected sounds reach our ears extremely rapidly

(50 ms – 100 ms after the direct sound), after reflecting

from one surface only — for example, from the ceiling or

a wall. These reflections fall into specific patterns as

shown in the diagram on page 65 for any particular

environment, and provide vital information to our ears.

Early reflections actually add clarity to the direct sound.

Reverberations

These are caused by reflections from more than one

surface — walls, ceiling, the back of the room — so

numerous that they merge together to form a continuous

sonic “afterglow”. They are non-directional, and lessen

the clarity of the direct sound.

Direct sound, early reflections and subsequent

reverberation taken together help us to determine the

subjective size and shape of the room, and it is this

information that the digital sound field processor

reproduces in order to create sound fields.

If you could create the appropriate early reflections and

subsequent reverberations in your listening room, you

would be able to create your own listening environment.

The acoustics in your room could be changed to those of

a concert hall, a dance floor, or virtually any size room at

all. This ability to create sound fields at will is exactly

what YAMAHA has done with the digital sound field

processor.

Sound Field Program Parameters

DSP programs consist of some parameters to determine

the apparent room size, reverberation time, distance from

you to the performer, etc. In each program, these

parameters are set with values precisely calculated by

YAMAHA to create a sound field unique to the program.

It is recommended to use DSP programs without

changing the values of parameters; however, this unit also

allows you to create your own sound fields. Starting with

one of the built-in programs, you can adjust those

parameters.

Each DSP program has a set of parameters that allow you

to change the characteristics of the acoustic environment

to precisely create the effect you want. These parameters

correspond to the many natural acoustic factors that create

the sound field you experience in an actual concert hall or

other listening environment. The size of the room, for

example, affects the length of time between the early

reflections. The “ROOM SIZE” parameter provided in

many of the DSP programs alters the timing between

these reflections, thus changing the shape of the “room”

you are listening. In addition to room size, the shape of

the room and the characteristics of its surfaces have a

significant effect on the final sound. Surfaces that absorb

sound, for example, cause the reflections and

reverberations to die out more quickly, while highly

reflective surfaces allow the reflections to carry on for a

longer period of time. The digital sound field parameters

allow you to control these and many other factors that

contribute to your personal sound field, allowing you to

essentially “redesign” the concert halls, theaters, etc.

provided to create custom-tailored listening environments

that ideally match your mood and music.

See “Digital Sound Field Parameter Descriptions” on

pages 65 to 68.

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM PARAMETER EDITING

4 Press k / n to select the

parameter.

5 Press –/+ to change the

parameter value.

• When you set the parameter to a value other than the factory-

set value, an asterisk mark (*) appears by the parameter name

on the video monitor.

6 Repeat steps 3 to 5 above as necessary to

change other program parameters.

Memory back-up

The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data

from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby

mode, the power cord is disconnected from the AC

outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to

power failure. However, if the power is cut for more

than one week, the parameter value you edited will

return to the factory setting. If so, edit the parameter

value again.

Resetting a Parameter to the

Factory-set Value

■ To reset some of the parameters

to the factory-set values

Select the parameter you want to reset. Then press and

hold –/+ until the value temporarily stops at the factory-

set value. The asterisk mark (*) by the parameter name

disappears on the video monitor.

■ To reset all of the parameters to

the factory-set values

Use “9 PARAM. INI” on the SET MENU to reset all of

the parameter values of all DSP programs within the

selected group to the factory-set values (see page 58).

This operation resets all of the parameter values of all

DSP programs within that group to the factory-set values.

Notes

• The available parameters may be displayed on more than one

OSD page for some of the programs. To scroll through pages,

press k / n.

• You cannot change parameter values when “14 MEMORY

GUARD” on the SET MENU is set to ON. If you want to

change the parameter values, set “14 MEMORY GUARD” to

OFF (see page 60).

Changing Parameter Settings

You can enjoy good quality sound with the factory-set

parameters. Although you do not have to change the

initial settings, you can change some of the parameters to

better suit the input source or your listening room.

Adjustments should be made with the remote control.

• We recommended that you edit the parameter while using a

video monitor. It is easier to see the video monitor than it is to

see the front panel display.

1 Set PARAMETER/SET

MENU to PARAMETER.

2 Turn on the video monitor

and press ON SCREEN

repeatedly to select the

full display mode.

3 Select a DSP program you want to adjust.

PARAMETER

SET MENU

P05 ROCK CONCERT

≥ Arena

ROOM SIZE…………1.0

LIVENESS…………………7

REV.TIME…………3.3s

REV.DELAY……240ms

INIT.DLY…………22ms

HALL 1

DSP

10KEY

ROCK

CONCERT

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

CONCERT

VIDEO

THEATER

ENTER-

TAINMENT

HALL 2

CHURCH

JAZZ CLUB

SELECT

/DTS

SUR.

100

11 12

234

ON SCREEN

Program No.

Example of the parameter setting display

Parameters

Cursor

Program name

HALL 1

6.1/ES

DSP

10KEY

ROCK

CONCERT

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MUTE

VOLUME

STEREO

TV INPUT

TV VOL

PRESET

DISC

PARAMETER

SET MENU

EFFECT

LEVEL

ON SCREEN

TESTSLEEP

TV MUTE

CONCERT

VIDEO

THEATER

ENTER-

TAINMENT

HALL 2

CHURCH

JAZZ CLUB

SELECT

/DTS

SUR.

CHP/INDEX

A/B/C/D/E

100

11 12

234

Parameter valves

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

Large value = 2.0Small value = 0.1

Sound Source

TimeTimeTime

Early

Reflections

Sound Source

Level

■ ROOM SIZE

[P. ROOM SIZE for the presence sound field] Control Range 0.1 – 2.0

Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent size of the surround sound field. The larger the value, the larger the

surround sound field becomes.

Description: As the sound is repeatedly reflected around a room, the larger the hall is, the longer the time between

the original reflected sound and the subsequent reflections. By controlling the time between the

reflected sounds, you can change the apparent size of the virtual venue. Changing this parameter from

one to two, doubles the apparent length of the room.

Large value = 99 msSmall value = 1 ms

Reflection Face

Sound Source

TimeTime Time

INIT.DLYINIT.DLYINIT.DLY

Early

Reflections

Sound Source

Level

DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS

You can adjust the values of certain digital sound field parameters so the sound fields are recreated accurately in your

listening room. Not all of the following parameters are found in every program.

■ INIT. DLY (Initial Delay)

[P. INT. DLY for the presence sound field] Control Range 1 – 99 msec

Function: This parameter changes the apparent distance from the source sound by adjusting the delay between the

direct sound and the first reflection heard by the listener.

Description: The smaller the value, the closer the sound source seems to the listener. The larger the value, the farther

the apparent distance seems. For a small room, this parameter would be set to a small value, and for a

large room, it would be set to a large value.

DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS

■ S. DELAY (Surround Delay) Control Range 0 – 49 msec (The range

depends on the signal format.)

Function: This parameter adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the surround sound.

■ S. INIT. DLY (Surround Initial Delay) Control Range 1 – 49 msec

Function: This parameter adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection on the surround side

of the sound field. You can only adjust this parameter when at least two front channels and two rear

channels are used.

■ S. ROOM SIZE (Surround Room Size) Control Range 0.1 – 2.0

Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent size of the surround sound field.

■ S. LIVENESS (Surround Liveness) Control Range 0 –10

Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent reflectivity of the virtual walls in the surround sound field.

■ RC INIT. DLY (Rear Center Initial Delay) Control Range 1 – 49 msec

Function: This parameter adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection in the rear center

sound field.

■ RC ROOM SIZE (Rear Center Room Size) Control Range 0.1 – 2.0

Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent size of the rear center sound field.

■ RC LIVENESS (Rear Center Liveness) Control Range 0 – 10

Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent reflectivity of the virtual wall in the rear center sound field.

Large value = 10Small value = 0

Large

Reflected Sound

Small Reflected

Sound

Sound Source

Live

TimeTimeTime

Dead

Sound Source

Level

■ LIVENESS Control Range 0 – 10

Function: This parameter adjusts the reflectivity of the virtual walls in the hall by changing the rate at which the

early reflections decay.

Description: The early reflections of a sound source decay much faster in a room with acoustically absorbent wall

surfaces than in one which has highly reflective surfaces. A room with acoustically absorbent surfaces

is referred to as “dead”, while a room with highly reflective surfaces is referred to as “live”. The

LIVENESS parameter lets you adjust the early reflection decay rate, and thus the “liveness” of the

room.

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM PARAMETER EDITINGDIGITAL SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS

60 dB 60 dB 60 dB

(dB)

60 dB

Level

Time

REV. LEVEL

Sound Source

■ REV. LEVEL (Reverberation Level) Control Range 0 – 100 %

Function: This parameter adjusts the volume of the reverberation sound.

Description: The larger the value, the stronger the reverberation becomes.

Time

REV. TIMEREV.

DELAY

Reverberation

Sound Source

Level

■ REV. DELAY (Reverberation Delay) Control Range 0 – 250 msec

Function: This parameter adjusts the time difference between the beginning of the direct sound and the beginning

of the reverberation sound.

Description: The larger the value, the later the reverberation sound begins. A later reverberation sound makes you

feel like you are in a larger acoustic environment.

Large value = 5.0 sSmall value = 1.0 s

Long

Reverberation

Short

Reverberation

Sound Source

REV. TIMEREV. TIMEREV. TIME

Early Reflections

ReverberationSound SourceReverberation

■ REV. TIME (Reverberation Time) Control Range 1.0 – 5.0 sec

Function: This parameter adjusts the amount of time it takes for the dense, subsequent reverberation sound to

decay by 60 dB (at 1 kHz). This changes the apparent size of the acoustic environment over an

extremely wide range.

Description: Set a longer reverberation time for “dead” sources and listening room environments, and a shorter time

for “live” sources and listening room environments.

DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS

For 6ch Stereo

■ CT LEVEL (Center Level) Control Range 0 – 100 %

Function: These parameters adjust the volume level for each channel in 6-channel stereo mode.

■ RL LEVEL (Rear Left Level) Control Range 0 – 100 %

Function: These parameters adjust the volume level for each channel in 6-channel stereo mode.

■ RR LEVEL (Rear Right Level) Control Range 0 – 100 %

Function: These parameters adjust the volume level for each channel in 6-channel stereo mode.

■ RC LEVEL (Rear Center Level) Control Range 0 – 100 %

Function: These parameters adjust the volume level for each channel in 6-channel stereo mode.

For PRO LOGIC Music

■ PANORAMA Control Range OFF/ON

Function: Extends the front stereo image to include the surround speakers for wraparound effect.

■ DIMENSION Control Range –3 – STD – +3

Function: Gradually adjusts the soundfield either towards the front or towards the rear.

■ CT WIDTH (Center Width) Control Range 0 – 7

Function: Adjusts the center image from all three front speakers to varying degrees.

English

INTRODUCTION PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERAIONT

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

TROUBLESHOOTING

Refer to the chart below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed

below or if the instruction below does not help, set this unit in the standby mode, disconnect the power cord, and contact

the nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center.

■ General

Problem

This unit fails to turn

on when STANDBY/

ON (or SYSTEM

POWER) is pressed,

or enters in the

standby mode soon

after the power has

been turned on.

On-screen display

does not appear.

No sound and/or no

picture.

The picture does not

appear.

Cause

The power cord is not connected or the

plug is not completely inserted.

The IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch

on the rear panel is not fully set to the

upper or lower position.

The protection circuitry has been

activated.

This unit has been exposed to a strong

external electric shock (such as lightning

and strong static electricity)

The setting for the on-screen display is

set to “DISPLAY OFF”.

The BLUE BACK setting under “13

DISPLAY SET” on the SET MENU is

set to OFF, and no video signal is input

to this unit.

Incorrect input or output cable

connections.

An appropriate input source has not been

selected.

The speaker connections are not secure.

The main speakers to be used have not

been selected properly.

The volume is turned down.

The sound is muted.

Digital signals other than PCM audio,

Dolby Digital or DTS signal which this

unit cannot reproduce are being input to

this unit by playing a CD-ROM, etc.

The output and input for the picture are

connected to different types of video

jacks.

Remedy

Firmly connect the power cord.

Set the switch fully to the upper or lower position

when this unit is in the standby mode.

Make sure all speaker wire connections on this unit

and on all speakers are secure and that the wire for

each connection does not touch anything other than

its respective connection.

Set this unit in the standby mode, disconnect the

power cord, plug it back in after 30 seconds, and

start operating.

Select the full display or short display mode.

Set BLUE BACK to AUTO to always show the

OSD.

Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists,

the cables may be defective.

Select an appropriate input source with INPUT l /

h or 6CH INPUT (or the input selector buttons).

Secure the connections.

Select the main speakers with SPEAKERS A and/or

Turn up the volume.

Press MUTE or any operation buttons of this unit to

cancel a mute and adjust the volume.

Play a source whose signals this unit can reproduce.

Make connections using the same type of jack

(between S VIDEO, VIDEO (composite), or

COMPONENT VIDEO jacks) for both the input and

output.

Refer

to page

—

11, 12

—

14, 15

TROUBLESHOOTING

Problem

The sound suddenly

goes off.

Only the speaker on

one side can be

heard.

No sound from the

effect speakers.

No sound from the

center speaker.

No sound from the

rear speakers.

No sound from the

subwoofer.

Poor bass

reproduction.

Cause

The protection circuit has been activated

because of a short circuit, etc.

The sleep timer has functioned.

The sound is muted.

Incorrect cable connections.

Incorrect setting of “3 L/R BALANCE”

on the SET MENU.

The sound effect is off.

A Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or

DTS decoding DSP program is being

used with material not encoded with

Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS.

A 96-kHz sampling digital signal is

being input to this unit.

The output level of the center speaker is

set to minimum.

“1A CENTER SP” on the SET MENU is

set to NONE.

One of the Hi-Fi DSP programs (1 to 6

except for Game and 6ch Stereo) has

been selected.

The source encoded with a Dolby Digital

or DTS signal does not have a center

channel signal.

The output level of the rear speakers is

set to minimum.

A monaural source is being played with

the program 11.

“1E LFE/BASS OUT” on the SET

MENU is set to MAIN when a Dolby

Digital or DTS signal is being played.

“1E LFE/BASS OUT” on the SET

MENU is set to SWFR or MAIN when a

2-channel source is being played.

The source does not contain low bass

signals (90 Hz and below).

“1E LFE/BASS OUT” on the SET

MENU is set to SWFR or BOTH and

your system does not include a

subwoofer.

The output mode for each speaker (main,

center, rear, or rear center) on the SET

MENU does not match your speaker

configuration.

Remedy

Check the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch is set

to the appropriate position and then turn this unit

back on.

Check the speaker wires are not touching each other

and then turn this unit back on.

Turn on the power, and play the source again.

Press MUTE or any operation buttons of this unit to

cancel a mute and adjust the volume.

Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists,

the cables may be defective.

Adjust it to the appropriate position.

Press STEREO/EFFECT to turn it on.

Select another DSP program.

Raise the level of the center speaker.

Select the appropriate mode for your center speaker.

Select another DSP program.

Raise the output level of the rear speakers.

Select another DSP program.

Select SWFR or BOTH.

Select BOTH.

Select MAIN.

Select the appropriate output mode for each speaker

based on the size of the speakers in your

configuration.

Refer

to page

—

11, 12

30 – 35

—

30 – 35

—

51 – 54

English

INTRODUCTION PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERAIONT

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

TROUBLESHOOTING

Problem

No sound from the rear

center speaker.

A “humming” sound

can be heard.

The volume level is low

while playing a record.

The volume level

cannot be increased, or

the sound is distorted.

The sound effect

cannot be recorded.

A source cannot be

recorded by a digital

recording component

connected to the

DIGITAL OUTPUT jack

of this unit.

The sound field

parameters and some

other settings on this

unit cannot be

changed.

This unit does not

operate properly.

“CHECK SP WIRES”

appears on the front

panel display.

The sound is degraded

when listening with

headphones connected

to a tape deck or CD

player that is connected

to this unit.

There is noise

interference from digital

or high-frequency

equipment, or this unit.

This unit suddenly

turns into the standby

mode.

Cause

“1D REAR CT SP” on the SET MENU is

set to NONE.

6.1/ES is not on.

Incorrect cable connections.

No connection from the turntable to the

GND terminal.

The record is being played on a turntable

with an MC cartridge.

The component connected to the OUT

(REC) jacks of this unit is turned off.

It is not possible to record the sound

effect by a recording component.

A source component is only connected to

the analog input jacks of this unit.

“14 MEMORY GUARD” on the SET

MENU is set to ON.

The internal microcomputer has been

frozen by an external electric shock (such

as lightning or excessive static electricity)

or by a power supply with low voltage.

Speaker cables are short circuited.

This unit is in the standby mode.

This unit is too close to the digital or

high-frequency equipment.

The internal temperature becomes too

high and the overheat protection circuitry

has been activated.

Remedy

Select LRG or SML.

Press the 6.1/ES button on the remote control to

turn it on.

Firmly connect the audio plugs. If the problem

persists, the cables may be defective.

Connect the grounding cord of your turntable to

the GND terminal of this unit.

The turntable should be connected to this unit

through an MC-head amplifier.

Turn on the power to the component.

Connect the source component to the DIGITAL

INPUT jacks of this unit.

Select OFF.

Disconnect the AC power cord from the outlet

and then plug it in again after about 30 seconds.

Make sure all speaker cables are connected

correctly.

Turn on the power of this unit.

Move this unit further away from such

equipment.

Wait until this unit cools down and then turn it

back on.

Refer

to page

28, 29

16, 17

—

14 – 17

—

TROUBLESHOOTING

Problem

The remote control

does not work nor

function properly.

The remote control

does not “learn” new

functions.

Continuous functions

such as volume

adjustment are learned,

but operate only for a

moment before

stopping.

Cause

Wrong distance or angle.

Direct sunlight or lighting (from an

inverter type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is

striking the remote control sensor of this

unit.

The batteries are weak.

The manufacturer code has not been

correctly set.

The batteries of this remote control and/

or the other remote control are too weak.

The distance between the two remote

controls is too much or too little.

The signal coding or modulation of the

other remote control is not compatible

with this remote control.

Memory capacity is full.

Even if the manufacturer code is

correctly set, there are some models that

do not respond to the remote control.

The learning process is incomplete.

Remedy

The remote control will function within a

maximum range of 6 m (20 feet) and no more

than 30 degrees off-axis from the front panel.

Reposition this unit.

Replace all batteries with new ones and press

RESET.

Set the manufacturer code correctly.

Try to set the other codes of the same

manufacturer.

Replace the batteries.

Place the remote controls at the proper distance.

Learning is not possible.

Further learning is not possible without deleting

unnecessary functions.

Program the necessary functions independently

into the programmable buttons on this unit’s

remote control using the Learn feature.

Be sure to press and hold the function button on

the other remote control until “OK” appears in

the display window.

Refer to

page

—

■ Remote control

English

INTRODUCTION PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERAIONT

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

GLOSSARY

■ Dolby Surround

Dolby Surround uses a four analog channel recording

system to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects:

two left and right main channels (stereo), a center channel

for dialog (monaural), and a rear channel for special

sound effects (monaural). The rear channel reproduces

sound within a narrow frequency range.

Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all video tapes

and laser discs, and in many TV and cable broadcasts as

well. The Dolby Pro Logic decoder built into this unit

employs a digital signal processing system that

automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel to

enhance moving sound effects and directionality.

■ Dolby Digital

Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that

gives you completely independent multi-channel audio.

With three front channels (left, center and right), and two

rear stereo channels, Dolby Digital provides five full-

range audio channels. With an additional channel

especially for bass effects, called LFE (low frequency

effect), the system has a total of 5.1 channels (LFE is

counted as 0.1 channel).

Using two-channel stereo for the rear speakers, more

accurate moving sound effects and surround sound

environment are possible than with Dolby Surround. The

wide dynamic range (from maximum to minimum

volume) reproduced by the five full-range channels and

the precise sound orientation generated using digital

sound processing provide listeners with previously

unheard of excitement and realism.

With this unit, any sound environment from monaural up

to a 5.1-channel configuration can be freely selected for

your enjoyment.

■ Dolby Pro Logic

Dolby Pro Logic is the improved technique to decode

vast numbers of existing Dolby Surround programs. This

new technology enables a discrete 5-channel playback

with two left and right main channels, a center channel,

and two left and right rear channels compared with one

limited rear channel for the conventional Pro Logic

technology. Also the music mode is available for 2-

channel sources in addition to the movie mode.

■ DTS (Digital Theater Systems)

Digital Surround

DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog

soundtracks of movies with a six-channel digital sound

track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie

theaters around the world. Digital Theater Systems Inc.

has developed a home theater system so that you can

enjoy the depth of sound and natural spatial

representation of DTS digital surround in your home.

This system is practically distortion-free, clear 6-channel

sound (technically, a left, right and center channels, two

rear channels, plus an LFE 0.1 channel as a subwoofer,

for a total of 5.1 channels).

■ DTS Neo: 6

Neo: 6 decodes the conventional 2-channel sources for 6

channel playback by the specific decoder. It enables

playback with the full-range channels with higher

separation just like digital discrete signal playback. Two

modes are available; “Music mode” for playing music

sources and “Cinema mode” for movies.

■ LFE 0.1 channel

This channel is for the reproduction of low bass signals.

The frequency range for this channel is 20 Hz to 120 Hz.

This channel is counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a

low frequency range compared to the full-range

reproduced by the other 5 channels in a Dolby Digital or

DTS 5.1 channel systems.

■ CINEMA DSP

DIGITAL

Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were

originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect

is best felt in a theater having many speakers and

designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions,

such as room size, wall material, number of speakers, and

so on, can differ so widely, it’s inevitable that there are

differences in the sound heard as well. Based on a wealth

of actually measured data, YAMAHA CINEMA DSP uses

YAMAHA original sound field technology to combine

Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital and DTS systems to

provide the visual and audio experience of movie theater

in the listening room of your own home.

■ SILENT CINEMA DSP

YAMAHA has developed a natural, realistic sound effect

DSP algorithm for headphones.

Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound

field so that accurate representations of all the sound field

programs can be enjoyed on headphones.

GLOSSARY

■ Virtual CINEMA DSP

YAMAHA has developed a virtual CINEMA DSP

algorithm that allows you to enjoy DSP sound field

surround effects even without any rear speakers by using

virtual rear speakers.

It is even possible to enjoy virtual CINEMA DSP in a

minimum two-speaker system that does not include a

center speaker.

■ S VIDEO signal

With S VIDEO signal system, the video signal normally

transmitted using a pin cable is separated and transmitted

as the Y signal for the luminance and the C signal for the

chrominance through the S VIDEO cable. Using the S

VIDEO jack eliminates video signal transmission loss and

allows recording and playback of even more beautiful

images.

■ Component video signal

With the component video signal system, the video signal

is separated into the Y signal for the luminance and the

and P

signals for the chrominance. Color can

be reproduced more faithfully with this system because

each of these signals is independent. The component

signal is also called the “color difference signal” because

the luminance signal is subtracted from the color signal.

A monitor with component input jacks is required in

order to use the component signal for output.

■ PCM (Linear PCM)

Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog

audio signal is digitized, recorded and transmitted without

using any compression. This is used as a method of

recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses a

technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per

very small unit of time. Standing for “pulse code

modulation”, the analog signal is encoded as pulses and

then modulated for recording.

■ Sampling frequency and number

of quantized bits

When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of

times the signal is sampled per second is called the

sampling frequency, while the degree of fineness when

converting the sound level into a numeric value is called

the number of quantized bits.

The range of rates that can be played back is determined

based on the sampling rate, while the dynamic range

representing the sound level difference is determined by

the number of quantized bits. In principle, the higher the

sampling frequency, the wider the range of frequencies

that can be played back, and the higher the number of

quantized bits, the more finely the sound level can be

reproduced.

■ I/O assignment (SET MENU)

Although component is normally connected according to

jack names shown on the rear panel, this unit includes a

function that assigns jacks according to the component

being connected. If the component being used differs

from the component name shown for this unit’s

component video input jacks or digital input/output jacks,

it is possible to assign jacks according to the component

being connected. This makes it possible to change the

jack assignment and effectively connect more component.

English

INTRODUCTION PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERAIONT

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

SPECIFICATIONS

AUDIO SECTION

• Minimum RMS Output Power for Main, Center, Rear

20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.02% THD, 8 Ω ..................................... 120 W

• DIN Standard Output Power

1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4 Ω ........................................................ 180 W

• Dynamic Power (IHF)

8/6/4/2 Ω ........................................................ 145/180/240/330 W

• Damping Factor

20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω ................................................. 200 or more

• Frequency Response

CD to Main L/R ...................................... 10 Hz to 100 kHz, –3 dB

• Total Harmonic Distortion

20 Hz to 20 kHz, 60 W, 8 Ω, Main L/R .............................. 0.008%

• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)

PHONO MM to Main L/R (5 mV, shorted) ......................... 81 dB

CD (250 mV, shorted) to Main L/R, Effect Off .................. 100 dB

• Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)

Main L/R ................................................................ 150 µV or less

• Channel Separation (1 kHz/10 kHz)

CD (5.1 kΩ terminated) to Main L/R ........................ 60 dB/45 dB

• Tone Control (Main L/R)

BASS Boost/Cut ...................................................... ±10 dB/50 Hz

TREBLE Boost/Cut ............................................... ±10 dB/20 kHz

BASS EXTENSION .................................................. +6 dB/60 Hz

• Phones Output ........................................................... 150 mV/100 Ω

• Input Sensitivity

CD, etc .................................................................... 150 mV/47 kΩ

PHONO ................................................................... 2.5 mV/47 kΩ

6CH INPUT .................................................... 150 mV/40 – 47 kΩ

• Output Level

REC OUT .............................................................. 150 mV/0.9 kΩ

PRE OUT .................................................................. 1.0 V/1.2 kΩ

SUBWOOFER .......................................................... 4.0 V/1.2 kΩ

VIDEO SECTION

• Video Signal Type ...................................................................... PAL

• Composite Video Signal Level ...................................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω

• S-Video Signal Level

Y ................................................................................. 1 Vp-p/75 Ω

C .......................................................................... 0.286 Vp-p/75 Ω

• Component Video Signal Level

Y ................................................................................. 1 Vp-p/75 Ω

, P

............................................................. 0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω

• Signal to Noise Ratio ............................................................... 50 dB

• Frequency Response (MONITOR OUT)

Composite, S-Video ................................. 5 Hz to 10 MHz, –3 dB

Component ................................................. DC to 60 MHz, –3 dB

GENERAL

• Power Supply .......................................................... AC 230V/50 Hz

• Power Consumption ............................................................... 500 W

Standby Mode ......................................................... approx. 1.2 W

• AC Outlets (Total 100 W maximum)

[Europe model] ..................................................... 3 (SWITCHED)

[U.K. model] ........................................................ 1 (SWITCHED)

• Dimension (W x H x D)

.................................................................... 435 x 191 x 468 mm

• Weight ...................................................................................... 21 kg

• Accessories ............................................................... Remote control

Batteries

Connection guide

Power cord [Europe model only]

* Specifications are subject to change without notice.

DSP-AX3200

AV AMPLIFIER

AMPLIFICATEUR AUDIO-VIDEO

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.

YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA

YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, F.R. OF GERMANY

YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD1 7JS, ENGLAND

YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN

YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA

Printed in Japan

V817900

OWNER’S MANUAL

MODE D’EMPLOI

BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG

BRUKSANVISNING

MANUALE DI ISTRUZIONI

MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES

GEBRUIKSAANWIJZING

DSP-AX3200

Transcripción de documentos

GB DSP-AX3200 DSP-AX3200 YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A. CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, F.R. OF GERMANY ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD1 7JS, ENGLAND SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA Printed in Japan V817900 AV AMPLIFIER AMPLIFICATEUR AUDIO-VIDEO OWNER’S MANUAL MODE D’EMPLOI BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG BRUKSANVISNING MANUALE DI ISTRUZIONI MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES GEBRUIKSAANWIJZING CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT. 1 To assure the finest performance, please read this manual carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference. 2 Install this unit in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean place with at least 30 cm on the top, 20 cm on the right and left, and 10 cm at the back of this unit — away from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration, dust, moisture, and/or cold. 3 Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances, motors, or transformers to avoid humming sounds. To prevent fire or electrical shock, do not place this unit where it may get exposed to rain, water, and/or any type of liquid. 4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from cold to hot, and do not locate this unit in a environment with high humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent condensation inside this unit, which may cause an electrical shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. 5 On the top of this unit, do not place: – Other components, as they may cause damage and/or discoloration on the surface of this unit. – Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. – Containers with liquid in them, as they may cause electrical shock to the user and/or damage to this unit. 6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain, etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature inside this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. 7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections are complete. 8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat, possibly causing damage. 15 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified YAMAHA service personnel when any service is needed. The cabinet should never be opened for any reasons. 16 When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time (i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet. 17 Be sure to read the “TROUBLESHOOTING” section on common operating errors before concluding that this unit is faulty. 18 Before moving this unit, press STANDBY/ON to set this unit in the standby mode, and disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet. This unit is not disconnected from the AC power source as long as it is connected to the wall outlet, even if this unit itself is turned off. This state is called the standby mode. In this state, this unit is designed to consume a very small quantity of power. ■ For U.K. customers If the socket outlets in the home are not suitable for the plug supplied with this appliance, it should be cut off and an appropriate 3 pin plug fitted. For details, refer to the instructions described below. Note • The plug severed from the mains lead must be destroyed, as a plug with bared flexible cord is hazardous if engaged in a live socket outlet. ■ Special Instructions for U.K. Model 9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords. IMPORTANT THE WIRES IN MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING CODE: 10 When disconnecting the power cord from the wall outlet, grasp the plug; do not pull the cord. Blue: NEUTRAL Brown: LIVE 11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth. 12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this unit with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. YAMAHA will not be held responsible for any damage resulting from use of this unit with a voltage other than specified. 13 To prevent damage by lightning, disconnect the power cord from the wall outlet during an electrical storm. 14 Take care of this unit so that no foreign objects and/or liquid drops inside this unit. CAUTION As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows: The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK. The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED. Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth terminal of the three pin plug. INTRODUCTION CONTENTS CONTENTS ....................................................... 1 FEATURES ........................................................ 2 GETTING STARTED ....................................... 3 Checking the Package Contents ............................... 3 Installing Batteries in the Remote Control ............... 3 CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS .................... 4 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES .............. 37 Control Area ........................................................... 37 Setting the Manufacturer Code .............................. 38 Programming a New Remote Control Function (Learn Feature) ................................................... 39 Using the Macro Feature ........................................ 40 Changing the Source Name in the Display Window ............................................................................ 42 Clearing Learned Functions, Macros, Renamed Source Names, and Setup Manufacturer Codes ... 42 Clearing a Learned Function or Macro .................. 43 Each Component Control Area .............................. 45 PREPARATION Front Panel ............................................................... 4 Remote Control ........................................................ 6 Using the Remote Control ........................................ 7 Front Panel Display .................................................. 8 Rear Panel ................................................................ 9 ADVANCED OPERATION INTRODUCTION INTRODUCTION SET MENU ...................................................... 50 PREPARATION SPEAKER SETUP .......................................... 10 CONNECTIONS ............................................. 14 Before Connecting Components ............................ 14 Connecting Video Components .............................. 14 Connecting Audio Components ............................. 16 Connecting to an External Amplifier ..................... 18 Connecting an External Decoder ............................ 18 Connecting the Power Supply Cords ...................... 19 Turning on the Power ............................................. 19 ON-SCREEN DISPLAY (OSD) ..................... 20 Summary of SPEAKER SET Items 1A through 1F ... 21 ADJUSTING THE LEVEL OF THE EFFECT SPEAKERS .................................................. 61 SLEEP TIMER ................................................ 62 ADJUSTING THE SPEAKER OUTPUT LEVELS ....................................................... 22 Setting the Sleep Timer .......................................... 62 Canceling the Sleep Timer ..................................... 62 SPEAKER MODE SETTINGS ..................... 21 ADVANCED OPERATION OSD Modes ............................................................ 20 Selecting the OSD Mode ........................................ 20 BASIC OPERATION Speakers to Be Used ............................................... 10 Speaker Placement ................................................. 10 Connecting the Speakers ........................................ 11 Adjusting the Items on the SET MENU ................. 50 1 SPEAKER SET (speaker mode settings) ........... 51 2 LOW FRQ TEST ............................................... 54 3 L/R BALANCE (balance of the left and right main speakers) ............................................................. 55 4 HP TONE CTRL (headphone tone control) ....... 55 5 CENTER GEQ (center graphic equalizer) ......... 55 6 INPUT RENAME .............................................. 56 7 I/O ASSIGNMENT ............................................ 56 8 INPUT MODE (initial input mode) ................... 57 9 PARAM. INI (parameter initialization) ............. 58 10 LFE LEVEL ..................................................... 58 11 D-RANGE ........................................................ 59 12 SP DELAY TIME ............................................. 59 13 DISPLAY SET .................................................. 60 14 MEMORY GUARD ......................................... 60 Before You Begin ................................................... 22 Using the Test Tone (TEST DOLBY SUR.) .......... 22 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION BASIC PLAYBACK ........................................ 24 Input Modes and Indications .................................. 26 Selecting a Sound Field Program ........................... 27 Selecting PRO LOGIC or Neo: 6 ....................... 28 DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PROCESSING (DSP) ............................................................ 30 Understanding Sound Fields .................................. 30 Hi-Fi DSP Programs ............................................... 30 CINEMA-DSP ................................................. 32 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION BASIC OPERATION SOUND FIELD PROGRAM PARAMETER EDITING ..................................................... 63 What is a sound field? ............................................ 63 Sound Field Program Parameters ........................... 63 Changing Parameter Settings ................................. 64 Resetting a Parameter to the Factory-set Value ...... 64 DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS ......................................... 65 TROUBLESHOOTING .................................. 69 GLOSSARY ..................................................... 73 SPECIFICATIONS ......................................... 75 Sound Design of CINEMA-DSP ............................ 32 CINEMA-DSP Programs ....................................... 34 BASIC RECORDING ..................................... 36 English 1 FEATURES Built-in 6-Channel Power Amplifier Other Features ◆ Minimum RMS Output Power (0.02% THD, 20 Hz – 20 kHz, 8Ω) Main: 120 W + 120 W Center: 120 W Rear: 120 W + 120 W Rear center: 120 W ◆ 96-kHz/24-bit D/A Converter ◆ “SET MENU” which Provides You with 14 Items for Optimizing This Unit for Your Audio/Video System ◆ Test Tone Generator for Easier Speaker Balance Adjustment ◆ 6-Channel External Decoder Input for Other Future Formats ◆ BASS EXTENSION for Reinforcing Bass Response ◆ On Screen Display Function Helpful in Controlling This Unit ◆ S Video Signal Input/Output Capability ◆ Component Video Input/Output Capability ◆ Optical and Coaxial Digital Audio Signal Jacks ◆ Sleep Timer ◆ Remote Control with Preset Manufacturer Codes and “Learning” Capability ◆ PROCESSOR DIRECT for no alteration of the original signal Multi-Mode Digital Sound Field Processing ◆ Dolby Pro Logic/Dolby Pro Logic Decoder ◆ Dolby Digital/Dolby Digital Matrix 6.1 Decoder ◆ DTS/DTS ES (Matrix 6.1, Discrete 6.1)/DTS Neo: 6 Decoder ◆ CINEMA DSP: Combination of YAMAHA DSP Technology and Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital or DTS ◆ Virtual CINEMA DSP ◆ SILENT CINEMA DSP • y indicates a tip for your operation. • Some operations can be performed by using either the buttons on the main unit or on the remote control. In cases when the button names differ between the main unit and the remote control, the button name on the remote control is given in parentheses in this manual. Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. 2 “DTS”, “DTS-ES Extended Surround” and “Neo: 6” are trademarks of Digital Theater System, Inc. GETTING STARTED INTRODUCTION Checking the Package Contents Check your package to make sure it has the following items. Batteries (3) (LR6) Remote control Connection Guide DVD Player OPTICAL OUT RE-NAME CLEAR LEARN MACRO OFF AUDIO OUT L CONNECTION GUIDE MACRO TRANSMIT ON S VIDEO OUT A STANDBY POWER B Subwoofer VIDEO OUT Rear Speaker Right COMPONENT VIDEO OUT Left R OPTICAL OUT SYSTEM VIDEO OUT PHONO V O V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD DIGITAL OUTPUT AUDIO R OPTICAL 1 AUDIO L VIDEO L R S VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO VIDEO P R /C R P B /C B Y MAIN OUT MAIN IN PRE OUT/MAIN IN SUB REAR WOOFER CENTER REAR (SURROUND) A 3 MD/ TAPE DVD IN (PLAY) DVD L L MD/TAPE 2 OUT (REC) CD-R 3 CD B D-TV /LD 4 3 D-TV /LD R R CENTER MONITOR OUT CBL /SAT IN (PLAY) CD-R 4 OUT (REC) CD-R IN 4 RS-232C VCR 1 5 SPEAKERS REAR CENTER 1 DVD OUT CD CENTER R REAR L (SURROUND) 6 PHONO D-TV /LD – FRONT : 6ΩMIN. /SPEAKER REAR : 4ΩMIN. /SPEAKER REAR CENTER : 4ΩMIN. /SPEAKER : 4ΩMIN. /SPEAKER CENTER MAIN A OR B : 4ΩMIN. /SPEAKER A+ B : 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER PREPARATION FRONT : 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER REAR : 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER REAR CENTER : 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER : 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER CENTER MAIN A OR B : 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER + MONITOR OUT SUB WOOFER S VIDEO VIDEO – R DIGITAL INPUT A MAIN + 6CH INPUT Analog audio signal – B CENTER L IMPEDANCE SELECTOR OUT SURROUND COAXIAL TITLE + SET BEFORE POWER ON MAIN CD 8 CBL /SAT 6CH INPUT + IN VCR 2 /DVR 7 – L R L SIGNAL GND R O Optical digital signal V ENTER S S video signal SOURCE VIDEO IN V SOUND MENU DISPLAY SELECT – SEARCH CHAPTER Video signal Signal flow + Right TV POWER 10KEY DSP 6.1/ES REC STOP HALL 2 HALL 1 PAUSE PLAY CHURCH JAZZ CLUB 1 2 3 4 ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT CONCERT VIDEO TV THEATER 6 7 5 MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 9 10 11 12 0 +10 +100 CHP/INDEX A/B/C/D/E Rear Center Speaker Left Main Speaker 8 Power Cord (Europe model only) SELECT PRESET TV INPUT TV VOL /DTS SUR. Center Speaker V817920 MUTE VOLUME CH STEREO TV MUTE DISC EFFECT PARAMETER ON SCREEN LEVEL SLEEP TEST SET MENU BASIC OPERAIONT Installing Batteries in the Remote Control RESET button After new batteries are correctly inserted, press the RESET button in the battery compartment using a ball point pen or similar object. (This does not clear the contents of the memory.) 4 Replace the cover as pressing until it snaps into place. If the remote control is without batteries for more than 3 minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the remote control, the contents of the memory may be cleared. When the memory is cleared, insert new batteries, set up the manufacturer code and program any acquired functions that may have been cleared. English 3 Insert three supplied batteries (LR6) in the correct direction by aligning the + and – marks on the batteries with the polarity markings (+ and –) on the inside of the battery compartment. APPENDIX Open the battery compartment cover. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 1 2 • Change all of the batteries if you notice the condition like; the operating range of the remote control decreases, the indicator does not flash or its light becomes dim. • Do not use old batteries together with new ones. • Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging carefully as these different types of batteries may have the same shape and color. • If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately. Avoid touching the leaked material or letting it come into contact with clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before installing new batteries. ADVANCED OPERATION ■ Notes on batteries 3 CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Front Panel 1 2 4 3 5 6 INPUT VOLUME INPUT MODE NATURAL SOUND AMPLIFIER D I G I TA L STANDBY /ON SPEAKERS A B DVD SOURCE D-TV/LD SILENT NEXT + TUNER S VIDEO CD VCR1 BASS PROCESSOR EXTENSION DIRECT VCR2 /DVR PHONES – SET MENU MD/TAPE CD-R CBL/SAT PHONO STEREO PROGRAM VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL 6CH INPUT V-AUX – + – + EFFECT BASS 7 8 9 0q TREBLE VIDEO AUX REC OUT w e r t yu i 1 STANDBY/ON 6 VOLUME Turns on and sets this unit in the standby mode. When you turn on this unit, you will hear a click and there will be a 4 to 5-second delay before this unit can reproduce sound. Controls the output level of all audio channels. This does not affect the REC OUT level. Standby mode In this mode, this unit consumes a small amount of power to receive infrared-signals from the remote control. 2 Remote control sensor Receives signals from the remote control. 3 Front panel display Shows information about the operational status of this unit (see page 8). 4 INPUT MODE Sets the priority for the types of input signals (AUTO, DTS, ANALOG) to receive when one component is connected to two or more input jacks of this unit (see page 26). Priority cannot be set when 6CH INPUT is selected as the input source. 5 INPUT l / h Selects the input source you want to listen to or watch. 4 7 PHONES jack Outputs audio signals for private listening with headphones. When you connect headphones, no signals are output to the PRE OUT jacks or to the speakers. 8 BASS EXTENSION Turns on or off the BASS EXTENSION function at each time the button is pressed, this feature boosts the bass frequency of the left and right main channels by +6 dB (60 Hz) while maintaining overall tonal balance. This boost is useful if you do not use a subwoofer. However, this boost may not be noticeable if “1B MAIN SP” on the SET MENU is set to SMALL and “1E LFE/ BASS OUT” is set to SWFR. 9 PROCESSOR DIRECT Turns on or off the PROCESSOR DIRECT function at each time the button is pressed. When this is on, BASS, TREBLE, and BASS EXTENSION are bypassed, eliminating any alteration of the original signal. 0 SPEAKERS A/B Turn on or off the set of main speakers connected to the A and/or B terminals on the rear panel at each time its corresponding button is pressed. CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS q BASS ■ Opening and closing the front panel door When you are not operating the controls behind the front panel door, close the door. w TREBLE Adjusts the high-frequency response for the left and right main channels. Turn the control to the right to increase or to the left to decrease the high-frequency response. YAM AH A NA TU RA L SO UN D AV AM PLIF IE R INTRODUCTION Adjusts the low-frequency response for the left and right main channels. Turn the control to the right to increase or to the left to decrease the low-frequency response. Note PREPARATION VO LU ME • If you increase or decrease the high-frequency or the lowfrequency sound to an extreme level, the tonal quality from the center and rear speakers may not match that of the left and right main speakers. e REC OUT Selects the source you want to direct to the audio/video recorder. To open, press gently on the lower part of the panel. BASIC OPERAIONT r STEREO/EFFECT Switches the normal stereo or DSP effect reproduction. When STEREO is selected, 2-channel input signals are directed to the main left and right speakers without effect sounds. All Dolby Digital and DTS audio signals except for the LFE channel are mixed down to the main left and right speakers. t PROGRAM l / h ADVANCED OPERATION Selects the DSP program. y 6CH INPUT Selects the source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks. The source selected by pressing 6CH INPUT takes priority over the source selected with INPUT l / h (or the input selector buttons on the remote control). u NEXT — SET MENU –/+ ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Changes the SET MENU settings. i VIDEO AUX jacks Input audio and video signals from a portable external source such as a game console. To reproduce source signals from these jacks, select V-AUX as the input source. APPENDIX English 5 CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Remote Control This section describes the controls and their functions of the remote control. See “REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES” on pages 37 to 49 for operating other components with this remote control. 1 2 3 MACRO TRANSMIT 4 5 RE-NAME CLEAR LEARN SYSTEM MACRO OFF ON POWER STANDBY A B PHONO V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD y u i o p a 6CH INPUT s TITLE 6 ENTER 7 SOURCE SELECT POWER 9 10KEY DSP 0 q 6.1/ES REC STOP HALL 2 HALL 1 CHAPTER + PAUSE PLAY CHURCH JAZZ CLUB 1 2 3 4 ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT CONCERT VIDEO TV THEATER 5 6 MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 9 10 11 12 0 +10 +100 A/B/C/D/E 7 /DTS SUR. 8 MUTE VOLUME CH DISC d f g h EFFECT PARAMETER LEVEL SLEEP TEST 5 SYSTEM POWER Turns on the power of this unit. 6 Display window Shows the selected source component that you are controlling. 7 SOURCE SELECT k/n Selects the another component to control independently from the input that has been selected by pressing an input selector button. 8 LIGHT Turns the light on or off. When you press this button once, the light turns on for about ten seconds. Press again to turn off the light. 0 Operation buttons Provides functions such as play, stop, skip, etc. for operating your other components selected by the input selector buttons. q 6.1/ES Turns on or off the Dolby Digital Matrix 6.1 or DTS ES decoder with 10KEY/DSP set to the DSP position. STEREO TV MUTE ON SCREEN 4 STANDBY Sets this unit in the standby mode. 9 10KEY/DSP Selects the numeric button (10KEY) mode or DSP mode. SELECT PRESET TV INPUT TV VOL r – SEARCH CHP/INDEX w e SOUND MENU DISPLAY 8 3 TRANSMIT indicator Flashes while the remote control is sending signals. j SET MENU k t w LEVEL Selects the effect speaker channel to be adjusted and sets the level. e ON SCREEN Selects the on-screen display (OSD) mode for your video monitor. r SLEEP Sets the sleep timer. t TEST Outputs the test tone to adjust the speaker levels. 1 Infrared window Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the component you want to operate. 2 RE-NAME Used for changing the input source name in the display window (see page 42). 6 y CLEAR Used for clearing functions acquired when using the learn and rename features, programmed macros, and set manufacturer codes (see pages 42 to 44). u LEARN Used for setting up the manufacturer code or for programming the functions of other remote controls (see pages 38 and 39). CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS i MACRO Used to program a series of operations for control by a single button (see pages 40 to 42). Using the Remote Control INPUT INTRODUCTION o MACRO ON/OFF Turns the macro function on and off. VOLUME INPUT MODE NATURAL SOUND AMPLIFIER D I G I TA L STANDBY /ON p Å and ı Switch the control area for the extra components that are not connected to this unit without changing the input. a Input selector buttons Select the input source and change the control area. SPEAKERS A B NEXT SOURCE DVD D-TV/LD SILENT – SET MENU + MD/TAPE CD-R TUNER CBL/SAT S VIDEO CD VCR1 BASS PROCESSOR EXTENSION DIRECT VCR2 /DVR PHONES PHONO STEREO PROGRAM VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL 6CH INPUT V-AUX – + – + EFFECT BASS 30° TREBLE REC OUT 30° VIDEO AUX Approximately 6 m (20 feet) PREPARATION s 6CH INPUT Selects the source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks. d DSP program/Numeric buttons Select DSP programs or numbers according to the position of 10KEY/DSP. g VOLUME +/– Increases or decreases the volume level. • Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote control. • Do not drop the remote control. • Do not leave or store the remote control in the following types of conditions: – high humidity or temperature such as near a heater, stove or bath; – dusty places; or – in places subject to extremely low temperatures. h STEREO/EFFECT Switches the normal stereo or DSP effect reproduction. When STEREO is selected, 2-channel input signals are directed to the main left and right speakers without effect sounds. All Dolby Digital and DTS audio signals except for the LFE channel are also directed to the main left and right speakers. ■ Handling the remote control j PARAMETER/SET MENU Selects the PARAMETER mode or SET MENU mode. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION k Cursor buttons k/n/–/+ Select and adjust DSP program parameters and SET MENU items according to the position of PARAMETER/ SET MENU. ADVANCED OPERATION The remote control transmits a directional infrared beam. Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote control sensor on the main unit during operation. BASIC OPERAIONT f MUTE Mutes the sound. The MUTE indicator turns on when the MUTE function is on. Press again to restore the audio output to the previous volume level. APPENDIX English 7 CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Front Panel Display 1 V AUX 2 VCR2/DVR VCR 1 DSP DISCRETE DIGITAL 6.1/ES PRO LOGIC / CBL/SAT VIRTUAL D TV/LD 34 MD/TAPE DVD CD R TUNER CD PHONO DTS Neo:6 DOLBY DIGITAL PRO LOGIC MOVIE THEATER 12 ENTERTAINMENT MUTE SLEEP BASS P. DIRECT PCM 6 7 89 VOLUME LFE SILENT SP AB 5 0 q 1 Processor indicators When any function of DSP , DTS, DISCRETE, PRO LOGIC / VIRTUAL, g, 6.1/ES , and activated, its indicator lights up. L C R RL RC RR w e r 0 DSP program indicators is 2 Input source indicator The name of the selected DSP program lights up when the ENTERTAINMENT, MOVIE THEATER 1, MOVIE THEATER 2 or V/DTS SURROUND DSP program is selected. Shows the current input source with a cursor. q Multi-information display 3 SLEEP indicator Shows the current DSP program name and other information when adjusting or changing settings. Lights up while the sleep timer is on. 4 MUTE indicator Flashes up while the MUTE function is on. 5 VOLUME level indicator Indicates the volume level. 6 v indicator Lights up when this unit is reproducing PCM (pulse code modulation) digital audio signals. 7 Headphones indicator Lights up when headphones are connected. 8 SP A B indicators Lights up according to which set of main speakers is selected. Both indicators light up when both sets of speakers are selected. 9 SILENT indicator Lights up when headphones are connected with the sound effect (see “SILENT CINEMA DSP” on page 29). 8 w BASS indicator Lights up while BASS EXTENSION is on. e P. DIRECT Lights up while PROCESSOR DIRECT is on. r Input channel indicator Indicates the channel components of input signals being received. CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Rear Panel 1 2 AUDIO AUDIO L R OPTICAL 1 3 MD/ TAPE IN (PLAY) R 4 VIDEO L S VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO VIDEO P R /C R P B /C B Y MAIN OUT MAIN IN 5 PRE OUT/MAIN IN SUB REAR WOOFER CENTER 6 INTRODUCTION DIGITAL OUTPUT 3 REAR (SURROUND) A DVD DVD L L R R MD/TAPE 2 OUT (REC) CD-R 4 3 3 CD B D-TV /LD D-TV /LD AC OUTLETS CENTER MONITOR OUT CBL /SAT IN (PLAY) CD-R 4 OUT (REC) CD-R IN 4 RS-232C VCR 1 5 SPEAKERS REAR CENTER 1 DVD OUT CD CENTER R REAR L (SURROUND) PHONO + IN + + 100W MAX. TOTAL PREPARATION SWITCHED 6 D-TV /LD IMPEDANCE SELECTOR SET BEFORE POWER ON VCR 2 /DVR 7 MAIN CD 8 REAR : 6ΩMIN. /SPEAKER REAR CENTER : 6ΩMIN. /SPEAKER : 4ΩMIN. /SPEAKER CENTER MAIN A OR B : 4ΩMIN. /SPEAKER A+ B : 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER OUT – – – B MAIN A 2 SURROUND CBL /SAT TUNER + COAXIAL 6CH INPUT SUB WOOFER S VIDEO – – R L L GND 8 2 9 0 q (Europe model) 1 DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks 2 Audio component jacks 9 Speaker terminals See pages 11 and 12 for connection information. 0 IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch 3 Video component jacks 4 PRE OUT/MAIN IN jacks Use this switch to match the amplifier output to your speaker impedance (see page 13). Set this unit in the standby mode before you change the setting of this switch. See page 18 for connection information. q AC OUTLETS 5 RS232C terminal Use these outlets to supply power to your other A/V components (see page 19). See pages 14 and 15 for connection information. This is a control expansion terminal for commercial use. Consult your dealer for details. ADVANCED OPERATION See pages 16 and 17 for connection information. BASIC OPERAIONT 7 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER 16ΩMIN. /SPEAKER VIDEO R DIGITAL INPUT REAR : REAR CENTER : : CENTER MAIN A OR B : A+ B : + MONITOR OUT CENTER ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 6 AC INLET (Europe model only) Use this inlet to plug in the supplied power cord. 7 DIGITAL INPUT jacks 8 6CH INPUT jacks See page 18 for connection information. APPENDIX English 9 PREPARATION SPEAKER SETUP Speakers to Be Used This unit has been designed to provide the best soundfield quality with a 6-speaker system, using left and right main speakers, left and right rear speakers, and a center and rear center speakers. If you use different brands of speakers (with different tonal qualities) in your system, the tone of a moving human voice and other types of sound may not shift smoothly. We recommend that you use speakers from the same manufacturer or speakers with the same tonal quality. The main speakers are used for the main source sound plus the effect sounds. They will probably be the speakers from your present stereo system. The rear speakers are used for the effect and surround sounds, and the center speaker is for the center sounds (dialog, vocals, etc.). The main speakers should be high-performance models and have enough power-handling capacity to accept the maximum output of your audio system. The other speakers do not have to be equal to the main speakers. For precise sound localization, however, it is ideal to use the models of equivalent performance with the main speakers. ■ Use of a subwoofer expands your sound field It is also possible to further expand your system with the addition of a subwoofer. The use of a subwoofer is effective not only for reinforcing bass frequencies from any or all channels, but also for reproducing the LFE (low-frequency effect) channel with high fidelity when the Dolby Digital signal or the DTS signal is played back. The YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System is ideal for natural and lively bass reproduction. Speaker Placement Refer to the following diagram when you place the speakers. Center speaker Main speaker (R) Rear speaker (R) Subwoofer Main speaker (L) 1.8 m (6 feet) Rear center speaker Rear speaker (L) ■ Main speakers Place the left and right main speakers an equal distance from the ideal listening position. The distance of each speaker from each side of the video monitor should be the same. ■ Center speaker Align the front face of the center speaker with the front face of your video monitor. Place the speaker as close to the monitor as possible, such as directly over or under the monitor and centrally between the main speakers. Note • If the center speaker is not used, the center channel sound will be heard from the left and right main speakers. In this case, “1A CENTER SP” on the SET MENU is set to NONE (see page 51 for details). ■ Rear speakers Place these speakers behind your listening position, facing slightly inwards, nearly 1.8 m (6 feet) above the floor. ■ Rear center speaker Place the rear center speaker in the center between the left and right rear speakers at the same height from the floor as the rear speakers. ■ Subwoofer The position of the subwoofer is not so critical, because low bass sounds are not highly directional. But it is better to place the subwoofer near the main speakers. Turn it slightly toward the center of the room to reduce the wall reflections. CAUTION Use magnetically shielded speakers. If this type of speakers still creates the interference with a monitor, place the speakers away from the monitor. 10 SPEAKER SETUP Connecting the Speakers CAUTION • Use speakers with the specified impedance shown on the rear panel of this unit. • Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other and do not let them touch any metal part of this unit. This could damage this unit and/or speakers. ■ Speaker cables A speaker cord is actually a pair of insulated cables running side by side. One of the cables is colored or shaped differently, perhaps with a stripe, groove or ridge. 10 mm (3/8”) 2 Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8”) of insulation from each of the speaker cables. 2 Twist the exposed wires of the cable together to prevent short circuits. ■ Connecting to the SPEAKERS terminals Red: positive (+) Black: negative (–) 2 3 Unscrew the knob. 3 Tighten the knob to secure the wire. Insert one bare wire into the hole in the side of each terminal. ADVANCED OPERATION 1 1 2 BASIC OPERATION 1 1 PREPARATION If necessary, use the SET MENU to change the speaker mode settings according to the number and size of the speakers in your configuration after you finish connecting your speakers. INTRODUCTION Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. If the connections are faulty, no sound will be heard from the speakers, and if the polarity of the speaker connections is incorrect, the sound will be unnatural and lack bass. ■ MAIN SPEAKERS terminals ■ REAR SPEAKERS terminals A rear speaker system can be connected to these terminals. ■ CENTER SPEAKER terminals A center speaker can be connected to these terminals. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION One or two speaker systems can be connected to these terminals. If you use only one speaker system, connect it to either of the MAIN A or B terminals. ■ REAR CENTER SPEAKER terminals APPENDIX A rear center speaker can be connected to these terminals. English 11 SPEAKER SETUP Main B speaker Right Center Rear Center speaker speaker Left 1 DIGITAL OUTPUT AUDIO R OPTICAL 1 3 MD/ TAPE IN (PLAY) AUDIO L R 2 VIDEO L S VIDEO Subwoofer system 3 COMPONENT VIDEO VIDEO P R /C R P B /C B Y MAIN OUT MAIN IN PRE OUT/MAIN IN SUB REAR WOOFER CENTER REAR (SURROUND) A DVD DVD L L R R MD/TAPE 2 OUT (REC) CD-R 4 3 3 CD B D-TV /LD D-TV /LD AC OUTLETS CENTER MONITOR OUT CBL /SAT IN (PLAY) CD-R 4 OUT (REC) CD-R IN 4 RS-232C VCR 1 5 SPEAKERS REAR CENTER 1 DVD OUT CD CENTER R REAR L (SURROUND) SWITCHED 6 PHONO D-TV /LD + IN + + 100W MAX. TOTAL IMPEDANCE SELECTOR SET BEFORE POWER ON VCR 2 /DVR 7 MAIN CD 8 OUT TUNER – – MAIN A + COAXIAL 6CH INPUT REAR : REAR CENTER : : CENTER MAIN A OR B : A+ B : + MONITOR OUT CENTER SUB WOOFER S VIDEO 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER 16ΩMIN. /SPEAKER VIDEO – R DIGITAL INPUT – B 2 SURROUND CBL /SAT REAR : 6ΩMIN. /SPEAKER REAR CENTER : 6ΩMIN. /SPEAKER : 4ΩMIN. /SPEAKER CENTER MAIN A OR B : 4ΩMIN. /SPEAKER A+ B : 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER – R L L GND (Europe model) 4 5 Right Left Main A speaker 1 6 7 Left Right Rear speaker 4 3 5 6 2 7 The diagram above shows the speaker layout in the listening room. ■ SUBWOOFER jack When using a subwoofer with built-in amplifier, including the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System, connect the input jack of the subwoofer system to this jack. Low bass signals distributed from the main, center and/or rear channels are directed to this jack if they are assigned to this jack. (The cut-off frequency of this jack is 90 Hz.) The LFE (low-frequency effect) signals generated when Dolby Digital or DTS is decoded are also directed if they are assigned to this jack. Notes • Adjust the volume level of the subwoofer with the control on the subwoofer. It is also possible to adjust the volume level by using the remote control of this unit (see ADJUSTING THE LEVEL OF THE EFFECT SPEAKERS on page 61). • Depending on the settings of “1 SPEAKER SET” and “10 LFE LEVEL” on the SET MENU, some signals may not be output from the SUBWOOFER jack. 12 SPEAKER SETUP ■ IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch Select the left and right position according to the impedance of the speakers in your system. Be sure to move this switch only when this unit is in the standby mode. Switch position Speaker IMPEDANCE SELECTOR SET BEFORE POWER ON REAR : REAR CENTER : CENTER : MAIN A OR B : A+ B : 6ΩMIN. 6ΩMIN. 4ΩMIN. 4ΩMIN. 8ΩMIN. REAR : REAR CENTER : CENTER : MAIN A OR B : A+ B : 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER 16ΩMIN. /SPEAKER /SPEAKER /SPEAKER /SPEAKER /SPEAKER /SPEAKER Main Rear Center The impedance must be 6 Ω or higher. Rear The impedance of each speaker must be 6 Ω or higher. Main If you use one set of main speakers, the impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher. If you use two sets of main speakers, the impedance of each speaker must be 16 Ω or higher. REAR : REAR CENTER : : CENTER MAIN A OR B : A+ B : 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER 16ΩMIN. /SPEAKER Center The impedance must be 8 Ω or higher. Rear Center The impedance must be 8 Ω or higher. ADVANCED OPERATION 100W MAX. TOTAL The impedance must be 4 Ω or higher. Lower Rear BASIC OPERATION SWITCHED Center SET BEFORE POWER ON REAR : 6ΩMIN. /SPEAKER REAR CENTER : 6ΩMIN. /SPEAKER : 4ΩMIN. /SPEAKER CENTER MAIN A OR B : 4ΩMIN. /SPEAKER A+ B : 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER If you use one set of main speakers, the impedance of each speaker must be 4 Ω or higher. If you use two sets of main speakers, the impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher. Upper AC OUTLETS IMPEDANCE SELECTOR Impedance level PREPARATION IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch INTRODUCTION WARNING Do not change the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch setting while the power of this unit is on, otherwise this unit may be damaged. If this unit fails to turn on when STANDBY/ON (or SYSTEM POWER) is pressed, the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch may not be fully slid to either position. If so, slide the switch to either position fully when this unit is in the standby mode. The impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION (Europe model) APPENDIX English 13 CONNECTIONS Before Connecting Components CAUTION Never connect this unit and other components to mains power until all connections between components have been completed. • Be sure all connections are made correctly, that is to say L (left) to L, R (right) to R, “+” to “+” and “–” to “–”. Some components require different connection methods and have different jack names. Refer to the operation instructions for each component to be connected to this unit. • When you connect other YAMAHA audio components (such as a tape deck, MD recorder and CD player or changer), connect them to the jack with the same number labels as !, #, $ etc. YAMAHA applies this labeling system to all its products. • After you have completed all connections, check them again to make sure they are correct. Connecting Video Components ■ About the video jacks There are three types of video jacks. Video signals input through the VIDEO jacks are the conventional composite video signals. Video signals input through the S VIDEO jacks are separated into luminance (Y) and color (C) video signals. The S-video signals achieve high-quality color reproduction. Video signals input through the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks are separated into luminance (Y) and color difference (PB/CB, PR/CR) video signals. The jacks are also separated into three for each signal. The description of the component video jacks may be different depending on the component (e.g. Y, CB, CR/Y, PB, PR/Y, B-Y, R-Y etc.). Component video signals provide the best quality in picture reproduction. If your video component has an S-video output or component video output, you can connect it to this unit. Connect the S-video signal output jack on your video component to the S VIDEO jack or connect the component signal output jacks on your video component to the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks. S VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO PR/ CR PB/ CB Y VIDEO S VIDEO VIDEO jack COMPONENT jack (composite) VIDEO jacks y • Each type of video jack works independently. Signals input through the composite video, S-video and component jacks are output through the corresponding composite video, S-video, and component jacks, respectively. • You can designate the input for the COMPONENT VIDEO A and B jacks according to your component by using “7 I/O ASSIGNMENT” on the SET MENU (see pages 56 and 57 for details). Notes • Use a commercially available S-video cable when connecting to the S VIDEO jack, and commercially available video cables when connecting to the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks. • When you are using the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks, check the details in the owner’s manual that came with the component being connected. ■ VIDEO AUX jacks (on the front panel) S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R These jacks are used to connect any video input source such as a game console and a video camera to this unit. OPTICAL VIDEO AUX S V L R O OPTICAL OUT AUDIO OUT R AUDIO OUT L VIDEO OUT S VIDEO OUT 14 Game console or video camera CONNECTIONS RF OUTPUT AUDIO OUTPUT OPTICAL OUTPUT LD player COMPONENT OUTPUT AUDIO OUTPUT TV/digital TV or LD player S VIDEO OUTPUT VIDEO OUTPUT V S DIGITAL OUTPUT AUDIO AUDIO L R OPTICAL 1 3 MD/ TAPE IN (PLAY) 2 OUT (REC) CD-R 4 R VIDEO L S VIDEO V S VIDEO OUTPUT PREPARATION L R COMPONENT OUTPUT DVD player S VIDEO OUTPUT R L INTRODUCTION OPTICAL OUTPUT COMPONENT VIDEO VIDEO P R /C R P B /C B Y A DVD DVD MD/TAPE 3 CD D-TV /LD CBL /SAT IN (PLAY) (Europe model) MONITOR OUT CD-R 4 O RF INPUT OUT (REC) CD-R VCR 1 1 O PHONO D-TV /LD *1 C IN VCR 2 /DVR 7 MAIN CD 8 C OUT CD 6 RF demodulator IN 4 5 DVD CBL /SAT OUT SURROUND 2 CENTER MONITOR OUT BASIC OPERATION 3 B D-TV /LD TUNER COAXIAL 6CH INPUT S VIDEO VIDEO ADVANCED OPERATION DIGITAL INPUT SUB WOOFER GND L R S AUDIO OUTPUT V R L R S S Cable TV or Satellite tuner indicates left analog cables R indicates right analog cables O indicates optical cables C indicates coaxial cables V indicates video cables indicates S-video cables VIDEO INPUT VCR 1 or VCR 2/ DVR (digital video recorder) AUDIO INPUT AUDIO OUTPUT *1 If your LD player has an RF OUTPUT jack, first connect it to S the RF INPUT on an RF V demodulator and then connect the RF OUTPUT on an RF VIDEO S VIDEO demodulator to the COAXIAL INPUT INPUT jack on this unit. COMPONENT INPUT Video monitor 15 English L VIDEO OUTPUT APPENDIX indicates signal direction S VIDEO OUTPUT V V S VIDEO INPUT VIDEO OUTPUT COAXIAL OUTPUT S L ADDITIONAL INFORMATION S VIDEO OUTPUT CONNECTIONS Connecting Audio Components ■ Connecting to digital jacks This unit has digital jacks for direct transmission of digital signals through either coaxial or fiber optic cables. You can use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital and DTS bitstreams. When you connect components to both the COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to the input signals from the COAXIAL jack. All digital input jacks are acceptable for 96-kHz sampling digital signals. y • You can designate the input for each digital jacks according to your component by using “7 I/O ASSIGNMENT” on the SET MENU (see pages 56 and 57 for details). Note • The OPTICAL jacks on this unit conform to the EIA standard. If you use a fiber optic cable that does not conform to this standard, this unit may not function properly. ■ Connecting a turntable PHONO jacks are for connecting a turntable with an MM or high-output MC cartridge. If you have a turntable with a low-output MC cartridge, use an in-line boosting transformer or MC-head amplifier when connecting to these jacks. y • Connect your turntable to the GND terminal to reduce noise in the signal. However you may hear less noise without the connection to the GND terminal for some record players. 16 ■ Connecting a CD player y • The COAXIAL CD and OPTICAL CD jacks are available for a CD player which has coaxial or optical digital output jacks. • When you connect a CD player to both the COAXIAL CD and OPTICAL CD jacks, priority is given to the input signals from the COAXIAL CD jack. ■ Connecting an MD recorder, tape deck or CD recorder y • DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks and analog OUT (REC) are independent. Only digital signals are output from DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks and analog signals from OUT (REC) jacks. • When you connect your recording component to both the analog and digital input and output jacks, the priority is given to the digital signal. Notes • When you connect a recording component to this unit, keep its power on while using this unit. If the power is off, this unit may distort the sound from other components. • When you record from a source component connected to this unit while this unit is set in the standby mode, the recorded sound may be distorted. To avoid this problem, turn on this unit. CONNECTIONS OPTICAL INPUT OPTICAL INPUT INPUT OUTPUT R L L OUTPUT R R 3 IN (PLAY) AUDIO L R VIDEO L S VIDEO R L R PREPARATION AUDIO OPTICAL 1 MD/ TAPE INPUT L O DIGITAL OUTPUT O OPTICAL OUTPUT CD recorder INTRODUCTION MD recorder or tape deck COMPONENT VIDEO VIDEO P R /C R P B /C B Y A DVD DVD MD/TAPE OPTICAL OUTPUT O 2 OUT (REC) CD-R 4 3 3 CD B D-TV /LD D-TV /LD MONITOR OUT CBL /SAT IN (PLAY) CD-R 4 OUT (REC) CD-R OUTPUT CD player IN 4 O VCR 1 L R 5 1 DVD 6 PHONO D-TV /LD IN MAIN CD 8 OUT 2 SURROUND CBL /SAT BASIC OPERATION VCR 2 /DVR 7 C OUT CD TUNER COAXIAL COAXIAL OUTPUT MONITOR OUT CENTER 6CH INPUT DIGITAL INPUT SUB WOOFER S VIDEO VIDEO GND (Europe model) R L OUTPUT GND CENTER OUTPUT SURROUND OUTPUT L R MAIN OUTPUT External decoder See page 18 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION SUBWOOFER OUTPUT R Turntable indicates signal direction indicates left analog cables R indicates right analog cables O indicates optical cables C indicates coaxial cables APPENDIX L ADVANCED OPERATION L English 17 CONNECTIONS Connecting to an External Amplifier If you want to increase the power output to the speakers, or want to use another amplifier, connect an external amplifier to the PRE OUT/MAIN IN jacks as follows. Note • When RCA pin plugs are connected to the PRE OUT/MAIN IN jacks for output to an external amplifier, it is not necessary to use the corresponding SPEAKERS terminals. 1 PRE OUT/MAIN IN SUB REAR WOOFER CENTER REAR (SURROUND) L L R R CENTER 3 4 5 1 MAIN OUT/IN jacks MAIN OUT jacks .... Main channel line output jacks. The signals output through these jacks are affected by VOLUME, BASS, TREBLE, and BASS EXTENSION settings. MAIN IN jacks ........ Line input to this unit’s Main channel amplifiers. When connecting to these jacks, signals input to the preamplifier of this unit will not be output from the main amplifier of this unit. 2 REAR CENTER jack Rear center channel line output jack. 3 CENTER jack Center channel line output jack. 4 SUBWOOFER jack When using a subwoofer with built-in amplifier, including the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System, connect the input jack of the subwoofer system to this jack. Low bass signals distributed from the main, center and/or rear channels are directed to this jack if they are assigned to this jack. (The cut-off frequency of this jack is 90 Hz.) The LFE (low-frequency effect) signals generated when Dolby Digital or DTS is decoded are also directed if they are assigned to this jack. Notes • Adjust the volume level of the subwoofer with the control on the subwoofer. It is also possible to adjust the volume level by using the remote control of this unit (see ADJUSTING THE LEVEL OF THE EFFECT SPEAKERS on page 61). • Depending on the settings of “1 SPEAKER SET” and “10 LFE LEVEL” on the SET MENU, some signals may not be output from the SUBWOOFER jack. 5 REAR (SURROUND) jacks Rear channel line output jacks. 18 This unit is equipped with 6 additional input jacks (left and right MAIN, CENTER, left and right SURROUND and SUBWOOFER) for discrete multi-channel input from an external decoder, sound processor or pre-amplifier. Connect the output jacks on your external decoder to the 6CH INPUT jacks. Be sure to match the left and right outputs to the left and right input jacks for the main and surround channels. Notes 2 MAIN OUT MAIN IN Connecting an External Decoder • When you select 6CH INPUT as the input source, this unit automatically turns off the digital sound field processor, and you cannot listen to DSP programs. • When you select 6CH INPUT as the input source, settings of “1 SPEAKER SET” on the SET MENU do not apply (except for 1F MAIN LEVEL). CONNECTIONS Connecting the Power Supply Cords Turning on the Power To AC outlet 1 INPUT VOLUME INPUT MODE AC OUTLETS NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER D I G I TA L STANDBY /ON INTRODUCTION When all connections are completed, turn on the power of this unit. SPEAKERS A B SOURCE TUNER S VIDEO CD VCR1 VCR2 /DVR PHONES + MD/TAPE CD-R CBL/SAT BASS PROCESSOR EXTENSION DIRECT 100W MAX. TOTAL – SET MENU NEXT DVD D-TV/LD SILENT SWITCHED PHONO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL 6CH INPUT PROGRAM STEREO V-AUX – + – + IMPEDANCE SELECTOR TREBLE PREPARATION EFFECT BASS VIDEO AUX REC OUT SET BEFORE POWER ON REAR : REAR CENTER : : CENTER MAIN A OR B : A+ B : 6ΩMIN. 6ΩMIN. 4ΩMIN. 4ΩMIN. 8ΩMIN. REAR : REAR CENTER : CENTER : MAIN A OR B : A+ B : 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER 16ΩMIN. /SPEAKER /SPEAKER /SPEAKER /SPEAKER /SPEAKER /SPEAKER MACRO TRANSMIT 1 RE-NAME CLEAR LEARN SYSTEM MACRO OFF ON POWER STANDBY A B PHONO V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD 6CH INPUT TITLE ENTER SOURCE DISPLAY SELECT POWER ■ Connecting the AC power cord 1 [Europe model] Plug the power cord into the AC inlet when all connections are complete, and then plug in this unit to the wall outlet. REC SOUND MENU – SEARCH STOP CHAPTER PAUSE + PLAY Press STANDBY/ON (SYSTEM POWER on the remote control) to turn on the power of this unit. SYSTEM POWER STANDBY /ON or Front panel Remote control The level of the main volume, and then the current DSP program name appear on the front panel display. [U.K. model] Plug in this unit to the wall outlet. 2 ADVANCED OPERATION Caution • Do not use other AC power cords than the one provided. Otherwise it may result in causing fire or an electrical shock. ■ AC OUTLETS (SWITCHED) BASIC OPERAIONT (Europe model) Turn on the video monitor connected to this unit. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Europe model ............................................... 3 OUTLETS U.K. model ..................................................... 1 OUTLET Use these outlets to connect the power cords from your components to this unit. The power to the AC OUTLETS is controlled by this unit’s STANDBY/ON (or SYSTEM POWER and STANDBY). These outlets will supply power to any connected component whenever this unit is turned on. The maximum power (total power consumption of components) that can be connected to the AC OUTLETS is 100 W. APPENDIX English 19 ON-SCREEN DISPLAY (OSD) You can display the operation information for this unit on a video monitor. If you display the SET MENU and DSP program parameter settings on a monitor, it is much easier to see the available options and parameters than it is by reading this information on the front panel display. y • If a video source is being reproduced, the OSD is superimposed over the image. • The OSD signal is not output to the OUT (REC) jack, and will not be recorded with any video signal. • You can set the OSD to turn on (blue background) or off when a video source is not being reproduced (or the source component is turned off) by using “13 DISPLAY SET” on the SET MENU (see page 60). OSD Modes Full display This mode always shows the DSP program parameter settings on the video monitor. Short display This mode briefly shows the same contents as the front panel display at the bottom of the screen and then disappears. Display off This mode briefly shows the “DISPLAY OFF” message at the bottom of the screen and then disappears. Afterwards, no changes to operations appear on the monitor except those of the ON SCREEN button. P01 CONCERT HALL 1 ≥ Europe Hall A INIT.DLY…………30ms ROOM SIZE…………1.O LIVENESS…………………5 P01 CONCERT HALL 1 Europe Hall A Short display y • When you choose the full display mode, INPUT l / h, VOLUME and some other types of operation information are displayed at the bottom of the screen in the same format as that for the front panel display. • The SET MENU and test tone display appear regardless of the OSD mode. 20 1 Turn on the video monitor connected to this unit. 2 Press ON SCREEN on the remote control repeatedly to change the display mode. The OSD mode changes in the following order: full display, short display, and display off. PARAMETER ON SCREEN LEVEL SLEEP TEST SET MENU Notes You can change the amount of information the OSD shows. Full display Selecting the OSD Mode • If you choose a video input source that has a component connected to both the S VIDEO IN and composite VIDEO IN jacks, and both the S VIDEO OUT and composite VIDEO OUT jacks are connected to a video monitor, the video signal is output to both the S VIDEO OUT and VIDEO OUT jacks. However, the OSD is carried only on the S-video signal. If no video signal is input, the OSD is carried on both the S-video and composite video signals. • If your video monitor is connected only to the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks of this unit, the OSD is not shown. Make sure to connect your video monitor to the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks and either VIDEO or S VIDEO jacks if you want to see the OSD. • Playing back video software that has an anti-copy signal or video signals with a lot of noise may produce unstable images. SPEAKER MODE SETTINGS Summary of SPEAKER SET Items 1A through 1F Item Description Selects the output mode according to whether or not a center speaker is being used and its performance. LRG/SML/NONE 1B MAIN SP Selects the output mode according to the performance of the main speakers. LARGE/SMALL 1C REAR L/R SP Selects the output mode according to whether or not rear L/R speakers are being used and their performance. LRG/SML/NONE 1D REAR CT SP Selects the output mode according to whether or not a rear center speaker is being used and its performance. LRG/SML/NONE 1E LFE/BASS OUT Selects the speaker according to use for LFE signal output and low bass signal. 1F MAIN LEVEL Selects the main speaker level. BASIC OPERAIONT 1A CENTER SP PREPARATION Control value (default setting indicated in bold) INTRODUCTION This unit has 6 SPEAKER SET items on the SET MENU that you must set according to the number of speakers in your configuration and their size. The following table summarizes these SPEAKER SET items, and shows the initial settings as well as other possible settings. SWFR/MAIN/BOTH Normal/–10 dB ADVANCED OPERATION If the initial settings shown in the above table are not appropriate for your speaker configuration, change settings following the steps described in “1 SPEAKER SET” from page 51 to 54. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION APPENDIX English 21 ADJUSTING THE SPEAKER OUTPUT LEVELS This section explains how to adjust the speaker output levels by using the test tone generator. When this adjustment is made, the output level heard at the listening position will be the same from each speaker. This is important for the best performance of the digital sound field processor, and various decoders (Dolby Digital, Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Pro Logic , DTS, DTS ES, and DTS Neo: 6). Note • Since this unit cannot enter the test mode while headphones are connected to this unit, be sure to unplug the headphones from the PHONES jack when using the test tone. 4 Set PARAMETER/SET MENU on the remote control to PARAMETER. PARAMETER SET MENU Using the Test Tone (TEST DOLBY SUR.) Use the test tone to balance the output levels of the 6 speakers required for a surround sound system. The adjustment of each speaker output level should be made at your listening position with the remote control. 2 Before You Begin INPUT VOLUME INPUT MODE NATURAL SOUND 2 AV RECEIVER D I G I TA L STANDBY /ON INPUT VOLUME INPUT MODE SPEAKERS A NATURAL SOUND B NEXT DVD AV RECEIVER D I G I TA L SOURCE D-TV/LD SILENT – SET MENU + MD/TAPE CD-R CBL/SAT TUNER S VIDEO CD VCR1 BASS PROCESSOR EXTENSION DIRECT VCR2 /DVR PHONES PHONO STEREO PROGRAM VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL 6CH INPUT V-AUX – + – + EFFECT BASS STANDBY /ON TREBLE VIDEO AUX REC OUT SPEAKERS A B – SET MENU NEXT DVD SOURCE D-TV/LD SILENT + MD/TAPE CD-R CBL/SAT TUNER S VIDEO CD VCR1 BASS PROCESSOR EXTENSION DIRECT VCR2 /DVR PHONES PHONO STEREO PROGRAM VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL 6CH INPUT V-AUX – + – + EFFECT BASS TREBLE VIDEO AUX REC OUT A/B/C/D/E PRESET TV INPUT TV VOL MUTE VOLUME CH STEREO TV MUTE DISC 2 EFFECT PARAMETER ON SCREEN LEVEL SLEEP TEST SET MENU 3 3 PRESET MUTE VOLUME CH STEREO TV MUTE DISC EFFECT PARAMETER ON SCREEN LEVEL SLEEP TEST SET MENU 4 1 Turn on the video monitor connected to this unit. 2 Press SPEAKERS A or B to select the main speakers to be used. If you are using two sets of the main speakers, press both A and B. 3 SPEAKERS A B BASS PROCESSOR EXTENSION DIRECT + BASS – + TREBLE Set to OFF. 22 1 Press TEST to output the test tone. 2 Adjust the volume so you can hear the test tone. The test tone is heard from the left main speaker, center speaker, right main speaker, right rear speaker, rear center speaker and left rear speaker in order. The tone is produced for 2.5 seconds each time. TEST VOLUME Set the BASS and TREBLE controls on the front panel to the center position and turn off BASS EXTENSION and PROCESSOR DIRECT by pressing the buttons. “BASS EXT. OFF” and “P. DIRECT OFF” appear on the front panel display. – 3 1, 4 A/B/C/D/E TV INPUT TV VOL or Front panel VOLUME Remote control ADJUSTING THE SPEAKER OUTPUT CONNECTIONS LEVELS LEFT Notes RIGHT RIGHT SURROUND REAR CENTER The state of the test tone output is also shown on the monitor by an image of the audio listening room. This is convenient for adjusting each speaker level. TEST DOLBY SUR. ADVANCED OPERATION Front panel display also indicates from which speaker the test tone is output in the order of TEST LEFT→TEST CENTER→TEST RIGHT→ TEST R SUR.→TEST REAR CNTR→TEST L SUR. • It is not necessary to readjust the speaker level once it is set as long as you do not change the speakers. You can enjoy listening to or watching the input source with the desired volume by adjusting the volume key. • You can increase the output levels of the effect speakers (center, left rear and right rear and rear center) to +10 dB. If the output level of these speakers is lower than that of the main speakers even after you have increased the output level of these speakers up to +10 dB, set “1F MAIN LEVEL” on the SET MENU to –10 dB (see page 54). This setting decreases the main speaker output level to about one-third of the normal level. After you have set “1F MAIN LEVEL” on the SET MENU to –10 dB, adjust the levels for the center and rear speakers again. Note • If the test tone cannot be heard, turn down the volume, set this unit in the standby mode and check the speaker connections. 3 BASIC OPERAIONT LEFT y PREPARATION LEFT SURROUND INTRODUCTION CENTER • The tonal quality of the center speaker can be adjusted by using “5 CENTER GEQ” on the SET MENU (see page 55). • If “1A CENTER SP” on the SET MENU is set to NONE, the center channel sound is automatically output from the left and right main speakers. • If “1C REAR L/R SP” on the SET MENU is set to NONE, the output level of the rear right, left and center speakers cannot be adjusted in step 3. The test tone will be circulated in the order of LEFT→CENTER→RIGHT→LEFT..., skipping the rear right and left speakers and the rear center speaker. • If “1D REAR CT SP” on the SET MENU is set to NONE, the out level of the rear center speaker cannot be adjusted in step 3. The test tone will be circulated in the order of LEFT→CENTER→RIGHT→RIGHT SURROUND→LEFT SURROUND→LEFT ..., skipping the rear center speaker. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Press –/+ repeatedly to adjust the output level of the effect speakers so that the output level coming from each speaker is the same. While adjusting, the test tone is heard from the selected speaker. y • You can stop the sequence temporarily by holding down k / n. 4 TEST APPENDIX When the adjustment is complete, press TEST to stop the test tone. English 23 BASIC PLAYBACK 1 3 4 6 INPUT VOLUME 4 INPUT MODE NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER D I G I TA L STANDBY /ON SPEAKERS A B NEXT DVD D-TV/LD SILENT SOURCE – SET MENU + MD/TAPE CD-R CBL/SAT TUNER S VIDEO CD VCR1 BASS PROCESSOR EXTENSION DIRECT VCR2 /DVR PHONES Press INPUT l / h repeatedly (one of the input selector buttons on the remote control) to select the input source. • The selected input source name and input mode appear on the front panel display for a few seconds. PHONO STEREO PROGRAM VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL 6CH INPUT V-AUX – + – + EFFECT BASS TREBLE VIDEO AUX REC OUT PHONO INPUT or 6 V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD 74 6 Front panel 7 MACRO TRANSMIT RE-NAME CLEAR LEARN SYSTEM 1 MACRO OFF ON STANDBY A V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD POWER B 10KEY DSP HALL 1 HALL 2 6.1/ES 3 4 CONCERT VIDEO TV THEATER 4 6 8 MOVIE THEATER 2 9 10 11 12 0 +10 +100 A/B/C/D/E /DTS SUR. SELECT PRESET TV INPUT TV VOL 6CH INPUT 7 MOVIE THEATER 1 CHP/INDEX MUTE VOLUME CH STEREO TV MUTE TITLE DISC 6 V AUX VCR2/DVR VCR 1 CBL/SAT POWER 10KEY DSP 1 SOUND MENU – SEARCH CHAPTER DVD MD/TAPE DVD SP A SOURCE DISPLAY D TV/LD CD R TUNER CD PHONO VOLUME EFFECT ENTER SELECT Remote control JAZZ CLUB 2 ENTERTAINMENT 5 PHONO CHURCH 1 ROCK CONCERT AUTO L R + REC STOP PAUSE PLAY HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB Selected input source Press STANDBY/ON (SYSTEM POWER on the remote control) to turn on the power. SYSTEM STANDBY /ON POWER To select a source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks Press 6CH INPUT until “6CH INPUT” appears on the front panel display. or 6CH INPUT 6CH INPUT or Front panel Remote control 2 Turn on the video monitor connected to this unit if you will play video sources. 3 Press SPEAKERS A or B to select the main speakers to be used. If you are using two sets of main speakers, press both A and B. The speaker indicator(s) for the selected set(s) lights up on the front panel display. 24 Front panel Remote control SPEAKERS A B Notes • If “6CH INPUT” is shown on the front panel display, no other source can be played. To select another input source with INPUT l / h (one of the input selector buttons), press 6CH INPUT to turn off “6CH INPUT” from the front panel display. • If you want to enjoy an audio source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks together with a video source, first select the video source and then press 6CH INPUT. BASIC PLAYBACK 5 Adjust the volume to the desired output level. If desired, use BASS, TREBLE and BASS EXTENSION. These controls are only effective for sound from the main speakers. VOLUME ■ BGV (background video) function The BGV function allows you to combine a video image from a video source with a sound from an audio source. For example, you can enjoy listening to classical music while having beautiful scenery from the video source on the video monitor. Select a source from the video group and then select a source from the audio group with the input selector buttons on the remote control. This selection for BGV cannot be made with INPUT l / h on the front panel. PHONO VOLUME V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD PREPARATION or Remote control ■ To mute the sound – + – BASS + MUTE y Front panel Note Select a DSP program if desired. Use PROGRAM l / h (DSP program buttons on the remote control) to select a DSP program. See pages 30 to 35 for details about the DSP program. or Front panel HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH STANDBY STANDBY /ON or JAZZ CLUB 1 2 3 4 ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT CONCERT VIDEO TV THEATER 5 6 7 MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 9 10 11 12 0 +10 +100 /DTS SUR. Press STANDBY/ON (STANDBY on the remote control) to set this unit in the standby mode. 8 Front panel ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 10KEY DSP PROGRAM ■ When you have finished using this unit ADVANCED OPERATION • If the component connected to the VCR 1 OUT, VCR 2/DVR OUT, CD-R OUT and MD/TAPE OUT jacks is turned off, the reproduced sound may be distorted or the volume may be lowered for the characteristics of AV component. In this case, turn on the component. • You can also cancel mute to press any operation buttons such as VOLUME +/–. • During muting, the “MUTE” indicator flashes on the front panel display. BASIC OPERATION Press MUTE on the remote control. To resume the audio output, press MUTE again. TREBLE BASS EXTENSION 7 INTRODUCTION 6 Start playback or select a broadcast station on the source component. Refer to the operation instructions for the component. Remote control SELECT Remote control APPENDIX English 25 BASIC PLAYBACK ■ Notes on the digital signal Input Modes and Indications This unit comes with various input jacks. You can set the priority of the input signal among different types of input signals. When you turn on the power of this unit, the input mode is set according to “8 INPUT MODE” on the SET MENU (see page 57 for details). Press INPUT MODE (the input selector button that you have pressed to select the input source on the remote control) repeatedly until the desired input mode is shown on the front panel display. Note • If “1B MAIN SP” on the SET MENU is set to SMALL and “1E LFE/BASS OUT” is set to SWFR, or “1E LFE/BASS OUT” is set to BOTH, the sound is also output from the subwoofer. PHONO INPUT MODE or V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD The digital input jacks of this unit can also handle 96-kHz sampling digital signals. (To utilize this, use a source that supports 96-kHz sampling digital signals and set the player for digital output. Refer to the operation instructions for the player.) Note the following when a 96kHz sampling digital signal is input to this unit: – DSP programs cannot be selected. Sound will be output as normal 2-channel stereo sound from only the left and right main speakers. – “Adjusting the Level of the Effect Speakers” described on page 61 cannot be made. ■ Notes on playing DTS-CD/LDs Front panel V AUX VCR2/DVR VCR 1 SP A CBL/SAT Remote control D TV/LD DVD MD/TAPE DVD CD R TUNER CD PHONO AUTO VOLUME L R Input mode AUTO: In this mode, the input signal is automatically selected in the following order: 1) Dolby Digital or DTS signal 2) Digital (PCM) signal 3) Analog signal DTS: In this mode, only the digital input signal encoded with DTS is selected even if another signal is input at the same time. ANALOG: In this mode, only the analog input signal is selected even if a digital signal is input at the same time. Notes • If digital signals are input from both the COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, the digital signal from the COAXIAL jack has precedence over the OPTICAL jack. • When AUTO is selected, this unit automatically determines the type of signal. If this unit detects a Dolby Digital or DTS signal, the decoder automatically switches to the appropriate setting. • In playing the disc encoded with Dolby Digital or DTS on some LD or DVD players, the sound output delays for a moment when playback resumes after a search because the digital signal is selected again. • When playing the LD source that has not been digitally recorded, the sound may not be output for some LD players. In this case, set the input mode to ANALOG. 26 • If the digital output data of the player has been processed in any way, you may not be able to perform DTS decoding even if you make a digital connection between this unit and the player. • If you play a source encoded with a DTS signal and set the input mode to ANALOG, this unit may reproduce the noise of an unprocessed DTS signal. In this case, connect the source to a digital input jack and set the input mode to AUTO or DTS. • If you switch the input mode to ANALOG while playing a source encoded with a DTS signal, this unit reproduces no sound. • If you play a source encoded with a DTS signal with the input mode set to AUTO; – This unit automatically switches to the DTSdecoding mode (The “t” indicator lights up.) after having detected the DTS signal. When playback of the DTS source is completed, the “t” indicator may flash. While this indicator is flashing, only DTS source can be played. If you want to play a normal PCM source soon, set the input mode back to AUTO. – The “t” indicator may flash when a search or skip operation is performed while the DTS source is playing back with the input mode set to AUTO. If this status continues for longer than 30 seconds, this unit will automatically switch from “DTS-decoding” mode to PCM digital signal input mode. The “t” indicator will turn off. BASIC PLAYBACK 3 Selecting a Sound Field Program 10KEY DSP 6.1/ES HALL 1 HALL 2 JAZZ CLUB 2 3 4 ENTERTAINMENT CONCERT VIDEO TV THEATER 5 6 7 MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 9 10 11 12 0 +10 +100 CHP/INDEX INPUT CHURCH 1 ROCK CONCERT /DTS SUR. 8 SELECT VOLUME INPUT MODE NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER INTRODUCTION You can enhance your listening experience by selecting a DSP program. There are 11 programs with sub-programs available with this unit. However the selection depends on the input signal format and not all the sub-programs are possible for all input signal formats. For details about each program, see pages 30 to 35. After selecting the desired program, press the same button repeatedly to select the desired sub-program if available. For example, to select the sub-program “DGTL SciFi”, press MOVIE THEATER 1 repeatedly. D I G I TA L STANDBY /ON A B – SET MENU NEXT DVD SOURCE D-TV/LD + MD/TAPE CD-R CBL/SAT TUNER S VIDEO CD VCR1 BASS PROCESSOR EXTENSION DIRECT VCR2 /DVR PHONO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL 6CH INPUT PROGRAM STEREO V-AUX – + – + V AUX EFFECT BASS TREBLE VIDEO AUX REC OUT VCR2/DVR VCR 1 DSP 2 1 HALL 1 HALL 2 1 ROCK CONCERT 6.1/ES CHURCH 2 3 4 ENTERTAINMENT CONCERT VIDEO TV THEATER 5 6 MOVIE THEATER 2 9 10 11 12 0 +10 +100 A/B/C/D/E 2,3 CD PHONO VOLUME DGTL Sci-Fi L RL C R RR VOLUME EFFECT 1 Set 10KEY/DSP to DSP on the remote control. 2 Press PROGRAM l / h (one of the DSP program buttons on the remote control) to select the desired program. The name of the selected program appears on the front panel display. 10KEY DSP 10KEY DSP or 6.1/ES HALL 1 HALL 2 JAZZ CLUB 2 3 4 ENTERTAINMENT CONCERT VIDEO TV THEATER 5 6 7 MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 9 10 11 12 0 +10 +100 CHP/INDEX Front panel CHURCH 1 ROCK CONCERT /DTS SUR. 8 SELECT Remote control ADDITIONAL INFORMATION PROGRAM ADVANCED OPERATION • Choose a DSP program based on your listening preference, and not on the name of the program. The acoustics of your listening room affect the DSP program. Minimize the sound reflections in your room to maximize the effect created by the program. • When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects the last DSP program used with that source. • When you set this unit in the standby mode, the current source and DSP program are memorized and are automatically selected when you turn on the power again. • If a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is input when the input mode is set to AUTO, the DSP program (No. 9–11) automatically switches to the appropriate decoding program. • When a monaural source is being played with PRO LOGIC/ Normal or PRO LOGIC/Enhanced, PRO LOGIC Movie, or Neo: 6 Cinema, no sound will be heard from the main speakers and the rear speakers. Sound can only be heard from the center speaker. However, if “1A CENTER SP” on the SET MENU is set to NONE, the center channel sound is output from the main speakers. • When a source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks of this unit is selected, the digital sound field processor cannot be used. • When 96-kHz sampling digital signals are input to this unit, the DSP program cannot be selected. In this case, the sound is reproduced as normal 2-channel stereo. STEREO DISC TUNER Notes 8 MUTE CH TV MUTE CD R SELECT PRESET TV INPUT TV VOL MD/TAPE BASIC OPERATION CHP/INDEX 7 DVD Sub-program name JAZZ CLUB MOVIE THEATER 1 /DTS SUR. D TV/LD LFE SP A 10KEY DSP CBL/SAT MOVIE THEATER 1 DIGITAL PREPARATION Program name SPEAKERS SILENT PHONES Program name V AUX VCR2/DVR VCR 1 CBL/SAT D TV/LD DVD MD/TAPE CD R TUNER CD PHONO VOLUME APPENDIX DSP MOVIE THEATER 1 LFE DIGITAL SP A DGTL Spectacle L RL C R RR Sub-program name English 27 BASIC PLAYBACK Selecting PRO LOGIC 3 or Neo: 6 You can enjoy the 2-channel sources decoded into five or six discrete channels by selecting PRO LOGIC or Neo: 6 in the program No. 11. INPUT Press the numeric button 12 repeatedly to select the decoder; PRO LOGIC, PRO LOGIC or Neo: 6. The decoder selection switches among PRO LOGIC, PRO LOGIC and Neo: 6 on the front panel display. VOLUME INPUT MODE NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER D I G I TA L 10KEY DSP HALL 1 6.1/ES B – SET MENU NEXT DVD SOURCE D-TV/LD SILENT CBL/SAT 4 TV THEATER 5 6 7 MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 9 10 11 12 0 +10 +100 CHP/INDEX 8 /DTS SUR. SELECT TUNER S VIDEO CD VCR1 BASS PROCESSOR EXTENSION DIRECT VCR2 /DVR PHONES JAZZ CLUB 3 CONCERT VIDEO + MD/TAPE CD-R CHURCH 2 ENTERTAINMENT SPEAKERS A HALL 2 1 ROCK CONCERT STANDBY /ON PHONO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL 6CH INPUT PROGRAM STEREO V-AUX – + – + EFFECT BASS TREBLE VIDEO AUX REC OUT 4 2 10KEY DSP HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB 2 3 4 ENTERTAINMENT CONCERT VIDEO TV THEATER 1 ROCK CONCERT 6.1/ES 7 6 MOVIE THEATER 2 9 10 11 12 0 +10 +100 CHP/INDEX 2,3,4 8 5 MOVIE THEATER 1 /DTS SUR. SELECT Neo: 6 Cinema ↔ Neo: 6 Music (when Neo: 6 is selected) PRESET A/B/C/D/E TV INPUT MUTE TV VOL VOLUME CH STEREO TV MUTE DISC After deciding on the decoder (PRO LOGIC or Neo: 6), select the mode to suit the source by pressing the numeric button 11. The selection switches as follow; PRO LOGIC Movie ↔ PRO LOGIC Music (when PRO LOGIC is selected) EFFECT 10KEY DSP 6.1/ES HALL 1 Select a 2-channel source and start playback on the source component. 2 Select PRO LOGIC (Movie/Music) or Neo: 6 (Cinema/Music) by pressing PROGRAM l / h on the front panel. PROGRAM CHURCH JAZZ CLUB 2 3 4 ENTERTAINMENT CONCERT VIDEO TV THEATER 5 6 7 MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 9 10 11 12 0 +10 +100 CHP/INDEX 1 HALL 2 1 ROCK CONCERT 8 /DTS SUR. SELECT ■ Playing the Dolby Digital Matrix 6.1 or DTS ES software Press 6.1/ES to turn on the Dolby Digital Matrix 6.1 or DTS ES decoder to listen to the Dolby Digital Matrix 6.1 and DTS ES software with a rear center speaker. 6.1/ES Front panel CHP/INDEX (For remote control only) 2 Press the numeric button 11 on the remote control. The previously selected sub program appears on the front panel display. 10KEY DSP 6.1/ES HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH 2 3 4 ENTERTAINMENT CONCERT VIDEO TV THEATER 5 6 MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 9 10 11 12 0 +10 +100 CHP/INDEX 7 /DTS SUR. VCR2/DVR VCR 1 PRO LOGIC / 28 CBL/SAT D TV/LD DVD MD/TAPE CD R TUNER SP A 6.1/ES CBL/SAT D TV/LD DVD MD/TAPE CD R TUNER CD PHONO VOLUME MOVIE THEATER 1 SP A Spectacle 6.1 L C R RL RC RR Notes CD PHONO • No sound will be output from the rear center speaker if you have set “1C REAR L/R SP” on the SET MENU to NONE. • The rear center speaker can be used when playing a 5.1channel source also. VOLUME PRO LOGIC DSP VCR 1 DIGITAL The display changes AUTO → Disc6.1 → Mtrx6.1 → OFF each time the 6.1/ES button is pressed. 8 SELECT Remote control V AUX VCR2/DVR DSP The “ c ” indicator lights up. JAZZ CLUB 1 ROCK CONCERT V AUX PRO LOGIC L R BASIC PLAYBACK AUTO: Mtrx6.1: OFF: Virtual CINEMA DSP Note Front panel Remote control Notes • If you turn off the sound effect, no sound is output from the center speaker, rear speakers and rear center speaker. • If you turn off the sound effect while a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is being output, the dynamic range of the signal is automatically compressed and the sounds of the center and rear speaker channels are mixed and output from the main speakers. • The volume may be greatly reduced when you turn off the sound effect or if you set “11 D-RANGE” on the SET MENU to MIN. In this case turn on the sound effect. ■ Displaying the information about the input source You can display the information such as the type, format and sampling frequency of the signal input from the component connected to this unit. 1 Select the input source you want to obtain the information about by pressing an input selector button. PHONO 2 V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD Press STEREO/EFFECT to light STEREO. STEREO EFFECT 3 Press k/n to display the information about the input signal. PARAMETER ON SCREEN LEVEL SLEEP TEST SET MENU APPENDIX You can enjoy the powerful sound field as if there were actual speakers with the SILENT CINEMA DSP. You can listen to SILENT CINEMA DSP by connecting your headphones to the PHONES jack while the digital sound field processor is on. Enjoy all the DSP program using the headphones. The “SILENT” indicator lights up on the front panel display. (If the sound effect is off, you listen to the source with normal stereo reproduction.) EFFECT ADDITIONAL INFORMATION SILENT CINEMA DSP or EFFECT ADVANCED OPERATION • This unit is not set in the virtual CINEMA DSP mode even if “1C REAR L/R SP” is set to NONE in the following cases: – when the 6ch Stereo, DOLBY DIGITAL Normal, Pro Logic Normal, Pro Logic , DTS Normal or Neo: 6 program is selected; – when the sound effect is turned off; – when 6CH INPUT is selected as the input source; – when 96-kHz sampling digital signals are input to this unit; – when using the test tone; or – when connecting the headphones. STEREO STEREO BASIC OPERATION With the Virtual CINEMA DSP, you can enjoy all the DSP programs without rear speakers. It creates the virtual speakers to reproduce the natural sound field. The sound field processing is changed to the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode according to the selected DSP program by setting “1C REAR L/R SP” on the SET MENU to NONE. Press STEREO/EFFECT to turn off the sound effect for normal stereo reproduction. Press STEREO/EFFECT again to turn the sound effect back on. PREPARATION ■ Virtual CINEMA DSP and SILENT CINEMA DSP ■ Normal Stereo Reproduction INTRODUCTION Disc6.1: This mode automatically switches Dolby Digital Matrix 6.1/DTS ES Matrix 6.1/DTS ES Discrete 6.1 depending on the signal in the input source that this unit can detect. Rear center speaker does not work for 5.1 channel sources. This mode can be selected only when the source with DTS ES Discrete format has been detected. This mode makes 6-channel playback of the input source through the Matrix 6.1 decoder. Rear center speaker does not work in this mode. (Except for when the DSP program “6ch Stereo” or “Neo: 6” is selected.) Notes • This unit is not set in the SILENT CINEMA DSP mode even if the sound effect is on; – when 96-kHz sampling digital signals are input to this unit. • The sound of LFE channel will be mixed and output from the headphone. English 29 DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PROCESSING (DSP) Understanding Sound Fields A sound field is defined as the “characteristic sound reflections of a particular space.” In concert halls and other music venues, we hear early reflections and reverberations as well as the direct sound produced by the artist(s). The variations in the early reflections and other reverberations among the different music venues is what gives each venue its special and recognizable sound quality. YAMAHA sent teams of sound engineers all around the world to measure the sound reflections of famous concert halls and music venues, and collect detailed sound field information such as the direction, strength, range, and delay time of those reflections. Then we stored this enormous amount of data in the ROM chips of this unit. ■ Recreating a sound field Recreating the sound field of a concert hall or an opera house requires localizing the virtual sound sources in your listening room. The traditional stereo system that uses only two speakers is not capable of recreating a realistic sound field. YAMAHA’s DSP requires four effect speakers to recreate sound fields based on the measured sound field data. The processor controls the strength and delay time of the signals output from the four effect speakers to localize the virtual sound sources in a full circle around the listener. Hi-Fi DSP Programs The following list gives you a brief description of the sound fields produced by each of the DSP programs. Keep in mind that most of these are precise digital recreations of actual acoustic environments. No. 1 2 3 30 Program CONCERT HALL 1 CONCERT HALL 2 CHURCH Features Europe Hall A This is a large fan-shaped concert hall with approximately 2500 seats. There is relatively little reflection from the walls, and sound spreads finely and beautifully. Europe Hall B This is a large shoe-box type concert hall with less than 2400 seats located in Frankfurt. This hall has a very solid, powerful sound. The listener’s virtual seat is in the center-right section on the first floor. U.S.A. Hall C This is a large 2600 seat concert hall in the United States which features a fairly traditional European design. The middle and high frequencies are richly and beautifully reinforced. Live Concert A large round concert hall with a rich surround effect. Pronounced reflections from all directions emphasize the extension of sounds. The sound field has a great deal of presence, and your virtual seat is near the center, close to the stage. Freiburg This program recreates the acoustic environment of a big church located in south Germany. The reverberation delay is very long while the early reflections are smaller than with other sound field programs. Royaumont This program features the sound field created by the refectory (dining hall) of a beautiful medieval Gothic monastery located in Royaumont on the outskirts of Paris. DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PROCESSING (DSP) No. 4 ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT This is the sound field at a jazz club in New York. It is in a basement and has a relatively spacious floor area. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the hall. The Bottom Line This is the sound field at stage front in “The Bottom Line”, a famous New York jazz club. The floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in a sound field offering a real and vibrant sound. The Roxy Theatre The ideal program for lively, dynamic rock music. The data for this program was recorded at LA’s “hottest” rock club. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center-left of the hall. Arena A classic shoe-box type concert hall. This program gives you long delays between direct sounds and effect sounds, with the extraordinarily spacious feel of a large arena. Disco This program recreates the acoustic environment of a lively disco in the heart of a big city. The sound is dense and highly concentrated. 6ch Stereo Using this program increases the listening position range. This is a sound field suitable for background music at parties. BASIC OPERATION Village Gate PREPARATION 6 JAZZ CLUB Features INTRODUCTION 5 Program ADVANCED OPERATION ADDITIONAL INFORMATION APPENDIX English 31 CINEMA-DSP Sound Design of CINEMA-DSP Filmmakers intend the dialog to be located right on the screen, the effect sound a little farther back, the music spread even farther back, and the surround sound around the listener. Of course, all of these sounds must be synchronized with the images on the screen. CINEMA-DSP is an upgraded version of YAMAHA DSP specially designed for movie soundtracks. CINEMA-DSP integrates the DTS, Dolby Digital, and Dolby Pro Logic surround sound technologies with YAMAHA DSP sound field programs to provide the surround sound field. It recreates the most complete movie sound design in your audio room. In CINEMA-DSP sound field programs, YAMAHA’s exclusive DSP processing is added to the right and left Main and Center channels, so the listener can enjoy realistic dialogue, depth of sound, smooth transition between sound sources, and a surround sound field that goes beyond the screen. When a DTS or Dolby Digital signal is detected, the CINEMA-DSP sound field processor automatically chooses the most suitable sound field program for that signal. L SURROUND SOUND FIELD PRESENCE SOUND FIELD DIALOG EFFECT MUSIC R SURROUND SOUND FIELD In addition to the DSP, this unit is equipped with various precise decoders; Dolby Pro Logic/Pro Logic /DTS Neo: 6 decoder for 2-channel sources, Dolby Digital/DTS decoder for multi-channel sources and Dolby Digital Matrix 6.1 or DTS ES decoder for a rear center channel. You can select the CINEMA-DSP program to optimize these decoders and the DSP sound patterns depending on the input source. 32 CINEMA-DSP ■ Dolby Digital/DTS + DSP sound field effect Left surround DSP sound field Right surround DSP sound field PREPARATION These programs use YAMAHA’s tri-field DSP processing on each of the Dolby Digital or DTS signals for the front, left surround and right surround channels. This processing enables this unit to reproduce the immense sound field and surround expression of a Dolby Digital- or DTSequipped movie theater without sacrificing the clear separation of all channels. Presence DSP sound field INTRODUCTION The 6-channel soundtracks found on 70-mm film produce precise sound field localization and rich, deep sound without using matrix processing. This unit’s MOVIE THEATER programs provide the same quality of sound and sound localization that 6-channel soundtracks do. The built-in Dolby Digital or DTS decoder brings the professional-quality sound designed for movie theaters into your home. With this unit’s MOVIE THEATER programs, you can recreate a dynamic sound that gives you the feeling of being at a public theater in your listening room by using Dolby Digital or DTS technology. ■ Dolby Digital Matrix 6.1/DTS ES + DSP sound field effect ■ Dolby Pro Logic + DSP sound field effect Surround DSP sound field ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ■ Dolby Pro Logic ADVANCED OPERATION Most movie software has 4-channel (left, center, right and surround) sound information encoded by Dolby Surround matrix processing and stored on the left and right tracks. These signals are processed by the Dolby Pro Logic decoder. The MOVIE THEATER programs are designed to recreate the spaciousness and delicate nuances of sound that tend to be lost in the encoding and decoding processes. Presence DSP sound field BASIC OPERATION These programs provide you with the maximum experience of the spacious surround effects since an extra rear center DSP sound field created from the rear center channel is added. /DTS Neo: 6 Dolby Pro Logic and DTS Neo: 6 equipped on this unit decode the 2-channel Dolby Surround software into five discrete full-range channels (3 channels in front and 2 or 3 channels in rear). They also provide two modes; MOVIE/ CINEMA for movies and MUSIC for 2-channel source. APPENDIX English 33 CINEMA-DSP CINEMA-DSP Programs ■ For movie programs: No. 9 to 11 According to the input signal format, this unit automatically chooses the appropriate decoder and DSP sound field pattern. Table of Program Names for Each Input Format Input No. 9 10 11 2 channel 6.1 channel *1 5.1 channel Stereo DOLBY DIGITAL DTS DOLBY DIGITAL DTS ES 70 mm Spectacle DGTL Spectacle DTS Spectacle Spectacle 6.1 Spectacle ES 70 mm Sci-Fi DGTL Sci-Fi DTS Sci-Fi Sci-Fi 6.1 Sci-Fi ES 70 mm Adventure DGTL Adventure DTS Adventure Adventure 6.1 Adventure ES 70 mm General DGTL General DTS General General 6.1 General ES — Normal — Matrix 6.1 — — Enhanced — Enhanced 6.1 — — — Normal — ES Matrix 6.1 ES Discrete 6.1 *2 — — Enhanced — Enhanced ES Normal — — — — Enhanced — — — — Movie — — — — Music — — — — Cinema — — — — Music — — — — Program MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 DOLBY DIGITAL DTS DIGITAL SUR PRO LOGIC PRO LOGIC DTS Neo: 6 *1 means the 6.1/ES decoder is ON. *2 means the DTS ES software encoded with Discrete 6.1 is input. y • If a Dolby Digital signal or DTS signal is input when the input mode is set to AUTO, the DSP program will be automatically switched to the Dolby Digital playback sound field or DTS playback sound field. • If Dolby Digital Surround EX software or DTS ES software is played when AUTO is selected by pressing the 6.1/ES button on the remote control, the Dolby Digital Matrix 6.1 or DTS ES decoder usually turns on and the corresponding DSP program is selected. • 6.1/ES on the remote control can be used to play Dolby Digital or DTS 5.1 channel sources with rear center speaker. In this case the program name changes to the corresponding name for 6.1 channel. • When playing 6.1 channel source with 6.1/ES on the remote control off, the program name changes to the corresponding name for 5.1 channel. Note • The “ 34 ” indicator does not light up when selecting the program No. 11 except for the Enhanced mode. CINEMA-DSP The following list gives you a brief description of the sound fields produced by each of the DSP programs. Keep in mind that most of these are precise digital recreations of actual acoustic environments. Note INTRODUCTION • Select the DSP program that you feel sounds best regardless of the name and description given for it below. No. 9 MOVIE THEATER 2 Spectacle This program creates the extremely wide sound field of a 70-mm movie theater. It precisely reproduces the source sound in detail, making both the video and the sound field incredibly real. This is ideal for any kind of video source encoded with Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS (especially large-scale movie productions). Sci-Fi This program clearly reproduces dialog and sound effects in the latest sound form of science fiction films, thus creating a broad and expansive cinematic space amid the silence. You can enjoy science fiction films in a virtual-space sound field that includes Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital and DTS-encoded software employing the most advanced techniques. Adventure This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the sound design of the newest 70-mm and multichannel soundtrack films. The sound field is made to be similar to that of the newest movie theaters, so the reverberations of the sound field itself are restrained as much as possible. General This program is for reproducing sounds from 70-mm and multichannel soundtrack films, and is characterized by a soft and extensive sound field. The presence sound field is relatively narrow. It spatially spreads all around and toward the screen, restraining the echo effect of conversations without losing clarity. Enhanced Mode ADVANCED OPERATION This program ideally simulates the multi-surround speaker systems of the 35-mm film theaters. Dolby Pro Logic decoding, Dolby Digital decoding or DTS decoding and digital sound field processing create precise effects without altering the original sound orientation. The surround effects produced by this sound field wrap around the viewer naturally from the back to the left and right, and toward the screen. BASIC OPERATION 11 MOVIE THEATER 1 Features PREPARATION 10 Program ■ For audio-video sources in 2-channel: No. 6 to 8 Program Features Game This program adds a deep and spatial feeling to video game sounds. 7 CONCERT VIDEO Pop/Rock This program produces an enthusiastic atmosphere and lets you feel as if you are at an actual jazz or rock concert. Opera This program provides excellent vocal depth and overall clarity by restraining excessive reverberation. The surround sound field is relatively moderate but it reproduces beautiful sound using data collected from a concert hall. Mono Movie This program is provided for reproducing monaural video sources (such as old movies). The program produces the optimum reverberation to create sound depth using only the presence sound field. Variety/Sports Though the presence sound field is relatively narrow, the surround sound field employs the sound environment of a large concert hall. With this program, you can enjoy watching various TV programs such as news, variety shows, music programs, or sports programs. 8 TV THEATER 35 English ENTERTAINMENT APPENDIX 6 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION No. BASIC RECORDING REC OUT allows you to record one source while watching and/or listening to another source. Recording adjustments and other operations are performed from the recording components. Refer to the operation instructions for these components. INPUT VOLUME INPUT MODE NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER D I G I TA L STANDBY /ON SPEAKERS A B NEXT DVD SOURCE D-TV/LD SILENT – SET MENU + MD/TAPE CD-R CBL/SAT TUNER S VIDEO CD VCR1 BASS PROCESSOR EXTENSION DIRECT VCR2 /DVR PHONES PHONO STEREO PROGRAM VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL 6CH INPUT V-AUX – + – + EFFECT BASS TREBLE VIDEO AUX REC OUT 2 1 Turn on the power to this unit and all connected components. 2 Select the source component you want to record from by using REC OUT. • To record the current input source that you are watching or listening to, set REC OUT to SOURCE. SOURCE DVD MD/TAPE D-TV/LD CD-R TUNER CBL/SAT VCR 1 CD VCR2 /DVR V-AUX PHONO REC OUT • To record the other source than the one that you are watching or listening to, set REC OUT to the source you want to record. SOURCE DVD MD/TAPE D-TV/LD CD-R TUNER CBL/SAT VCR 1 CD VCR2 /DVR V-AUX PHONO REC OUT Note • At this setting, you can change the source to listen to or watch during recording by pressing INPUT l/h (one of the input selector buttons on the remote control). 3 Start playback (or select a broadcast station) on the source component. 4 Start recording on the recording component. y • Setting REC OUT to SOURCE and using the BGV function (see page 25) allows the recording of audio and video from a different source. 36 Notes • Do a test recording before you start an actual recording. • When this unit is set in the standby mode, you cannot record between other components connected to this unit. • The setting of BASS, TREBLE, BASS EXTENSION, VOLUME, “3 L/R BALANCE” on the SET MENU and DSP programs does not affect the recorded material. • A source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks of this unit cannot be recorded. • S-video and composite video signals pass independently through this unit’s video circuits. Therefore, when recording or dubbing video signals, if your video source component is connected to provide only an S-video (or only a composite video) signal, you can record only an S-video (or only a composite video) signal by your VCR. • A given input source is not output on the same REC OUT channel. (For example, the signal input from VCR 1 IN is not output on VCR 1 OUT.) • Check the copyright laws in your country to record from records, CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material may infringe copyright laws. If you playback a video source that uses scrambled or encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the picture itself may be disturbed due to those signals. ■ Special considerations when recording DTS software The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. Attempting to digitally record the DTS bitstream will result in noise being recorded. Therefore, if you want to use this unit to record sources that have DTS signals recorded on them, the following considerations and adjustments need to be made. For LDs, DVDs and CDs encoded with DTS, when your player is compatible with the DTS format, follow its operation instruction to make a setting so that the analog signal will be output from the player. ■ Timer playback/recording This unit can perform playback or recording with an external timer (not supplied). Refer to the operation instruction for the component and the timer to be used. Notes • The stored data such as input source will be reflected in the playback or recording with the timer. • If you do not want any sound output during the recording with a timer, turn the volume down. Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data (input source, volume level, set menu settings and so on) from being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode (disconnected from the AC outlet). However if the timer is turned off for more than one week, the stored data will be lost. REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES This remote control also has two sophisticated features: Learn and Macro. The Learn feature allows it to acquire functions from the remote controls of other components in your system (or other household appliances) equipped with an infrared remote control receiver. The Macro feature allows you to program a series of operations in sequence for operation by a single button, or to use the factory-set macros to operate other YAMAHA components. These features make it possible for you to reduce the number of remote control in your entertainment room. PREPARATION Notes • For the operating distance of the remote control and notes about batteries, see pages 3 and 7. • For the name and function of each part and button, see pages 6 and 7. Control Area ■ Control area for each component The control area of this unit is the shaded area shown below. You can use the functions within this area no matter which component control area is selected. The component control area is the shaded area shown below. Each component has different functions for the operation buttons in the component control area. The component which has been chosen by pressing an input selector button or SOURCE SELECT k/n can be controlled and the display window shows the corresponding name of the component to be operated. MACRO TRANSMIT RE-NAME CLEAR LEARN SYSTEM OFF ON A V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD B PHONO 6CH INPUT TITLE ENTER SOURCE SELECT POWER DSP is selected 10KEY DSP 6.1/ES SOUND MENU DISPLAY – SEARCH CHAPTER + REC STOP PAUSE PLAY HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB 2 3 4 ENTERTAINMENT CONCERT VIDEO TV THEATER 5 6 7 8 MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 9 10 11 12 0 +10 +100 CHP/INDEX /DTS SUR. MACRO TRANSMIT RE-NAME CLEAR LEARN SYSTEM MACRO OFF ON STANDBY A V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD POWER B PHONO 6CH INPUT TITLE ENTER TITLE SOURCE SELECT SOUND MENU DISPLAY – SEARCH SELECT REC STOP PAUSE PRESET TV INPUT TV VOL MUTE 10KEY DSP VOLUME CH STEREO TV MUTE DISC EFFECT 6.1/ES PARAMETER ON SCREEN LEVEL SET MENU SLEEP 10 key is selected POWER HALL 2 HALL 1 REC CHURCH STOP JAZZ CLUB 1 2 3 4 ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT CONCERT VIDEO TV THEATER 5 6 MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 9 10 HALL 1 7 A/B/C/D/E 2 1 /DTS SUR. SELECT ENTERTAINMENT 12 6 +100 +105 6.1/ES PRESET PLAY CHURCH JAZZ CLUB 3 4 CONCERT VIDEO TV THEATER 7 8 9 10 11 12 0 +10 +100 MUTE CH + PAUSE MOVIE THEATER 2 CHP/INDEX TV INPUT CHAPTER MOVIE THEATER 1 TEST TV VOL HALL 8 2 ROCK CONCERT 11 0 CHP/INDEX SOUND – SEARCH A/B/C/D/E ENTER MENU PLAY DISPLAY POWER + CHAPTER A/B/C/D/E /DTS SUR. SELECT ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 1 ROCK CONCERT Input selector buttons and Å/ ı buttons switch the control area for each component. * Å/ı buttons are to operate the other components that are not connected to this unit. Å and ı buttons cannot be used as an input selector button. Factory setting: Å ........... LD player ı ..... Satellite tuner ADVANCED OPERATION Input selector buttons, and Å/ı buttons MACRO STANDBY BASIC OPERATION ■ Control area of this unit POWER INTRODUCTION The remote control can operate other A/V components of YAMAHA and other manufacturers as well as this unit. To control those components, you must set up remote control with the manufacturer codes. VOLUME PRESET STEREO TV MUTE DISC TV INPUT EFFECT TV VOL CH TV MUTE DISC APPENDIX Component control area There are 13 component control areas (See pages 45 to 49). You can set up the manufacturer code and program other remote control functions in each area. See pages 38 to 39. English 37 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES Setting the Manufacturer Code 3 You can control other components by setting a manufacturer code. A code can be set up in each component control area. Press k / n to select the name of your component’s manufacturer. You will find the names of most worldwide audiovideo manufacturers in alphabetical order in the display window. The following table shows factory-set component (Library: component category) and the manufacturer code for each area. If you are to make a setting for different component from the factory setting, change the library as described in step 3 on right. 1 Input area Component category (Library) Manufacturer A LD YAMAHA – B SATELLITE TUNER PHONO TV – TUNER TUNER YAMAHA CD CD YAMAHA V-AUX VCR – CBL/SAT CABLE – MD/TAPE MD YAMAHA CD-R CD-R YAMAHA D-TV/LD TV – VCR 1 VCR – VCR 2/DVR VCR – DVD DVD YAMAHA ENTER If you want to change a library (component category), press l / h. You can set a different component from the input selector name. Library choices: DVD, LD, CD, CD-R, MD, TAPE, TUNER, AMP, TV, CABLE, DBS, SAT, VCR Note If the manufacturer of your component has more than one codes, try each of them until you find the correct one as checking if it works following step 4. 4 Press an input selector button, Å or ı to select the source component you want to set up. Press one of the buttons shaded below to check if it works for the component being set. If it does, the manufacturer code setting has been correctly made. 6CH INPUT TITLE A B PHONO V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD ENTER SOURCE DISPLAY SELECT POWER 2 Press and hold LEARN for about 3 seconds by using a ballpoint pen or similar object. “SETUP” and the selected component name appear alternately in the display window. SEARCH REC SOUND MENU STOP – CHAPTER PAUSE + PLAY y • If you continuously want to set up another code for another component, press ENTER and repeat steps 1, 3 and 4. 5 Press LEARN again to exit from the setup mode. LEARN LEARN Notes Notes • Press LEARN for at least 3 seconds, otherwise the learning process is started. • If you do not press any button within 30 seconds during step 3, the setup process is canceled. If this happens, start over from step 2. 38 • If you have already programmed a remote control function for a button, the function by learning or macro programming takes priority over the setup manufacturer code’s function. • “ERROR” appears in the display window under the following circumstances: – when pressing a button other than the cursor and ENTER; – when pressing more than one button at once; or – when MACRO ON/OFF, 10KEY/DSP or PARAMETER/SET MENU is switched to another position. REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES Programming a New Remote Control Function (Learn Feature) RE-NAME CLEAR LEARN A MACRO B ON MACRO OFF PHONO INTRODUCTION TRANSMIT STANDBY CD SYSTEM CD-R POWER MD/TAPE 6CH INPUT TUNER ENTER V-AUX TITLE DVD SOURCE VCR2/DVR Press and hold the button on the other remote control that has the function you want to program into this remote control until “OK” appears in the display window. VCR 1 6 If you want to program functions not included in the basic operations covered by the manufacturer code, or a manufacturer code is not available, the following procedure needs to be performed. The possible programming area is the same as a component control area, so the buttons are programmable independently for each source component area. CBL/SAT Press the button for which you want to program the new function. “LEARN” is displayed. D-TV/LD 5 Note TRANSMIT SYSTEM RE-NAME LEARN A MACRO B ON MACRO OFF CD BASIC OPERATION CLEAR DVD PHONO DVD CD-R VCR2/DVR MD/TAPE VCR 1 STANDBY CBL/SAT TUNER CD D-TV/LD 6CH INPUT CD-R ENTER MD/TAPE V-AUX TITLE B TUNER POWER SOURCE A V-AUX VCR2/DVR Press an input selector button, Å or ı to select a source component. VCR 1 2 10KEY DSP CBL/SAT Set 10KEY/DSP to 10KEY. D-TV/LD 1 PREPARATION • This remote control transmits infrared rays. If the other remote control also uses infrared rays, this remote control can learn most of the other remote control’s functions. However, you may not be able to program some special signals or extremely long transmissions. (Refer to the operation instructions for the other remote control.) PHONO Notes Place this remote control and the other remote control about 5 to 10 cm apart on a flat surface so that their infrared transmitters are aimed at each other. ON Repeat steps 5 and 6 to program additional functions. 8 Press LEARN again to exit from the learning mode. MACRO CD OFF DVD PHONO 6CH INPUT 7 5 to 10 cm (2 to 4 inch) 4 LEARN Note • If you do not press any button within 30 seconds during steps 5 and 6, the learning process is canceled. If this happens, start over from step 4. 39 English Flashes alternately Notes • It is also possible to program in the control area of this unit with 10KEY/DSP set to DSP. However, if you program functions in this area, you cannot control this unit and select a DSP program. • If the batteries in the other remote control are weak, they may not have enough power to transmit signals to this remote control. • When the remote controls are either too close together or too far apart, you may not be able to program this remote control. • Direct sunlight interferes with infrared rays. • “ERROR” appears in the display window in the following circumstances: – when pressing more than one button at once; or – when MACRO ON/OFF is switched to another position. APPENDIX Press LEARN by using a ballpoint pen or similar object. Do not press and hold LEARN longer than three seconds. Otherwise this unit enters the manufacturer code setting mode. LEARN ADDITIONAL INFORMATION MACRO B LEARN A CD-R CLEAR MD/TAPE RE-NAME STANDBY TRANSMIT TUNER SYSTEM V-AUX POWER VCR 1 ENTER VCR2/DVR CBL/SAT TITLE D-TV/LD SOURCE • “NG” appears in the display window when programming has not been done correctly. In this case, start over from step 5. • This remote control can learn approximately 120 functions. However depending on the signals learned, “FULL” may appear in the display window much earlier than this number. In this case, clear unnecessary programmed functions to make further learning on the remote control. ADVANCED OPERATION 3 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES Using the Macro Feature The Macro feature makes it possible to perform a series of operations by pressing just one button. For example, when you want to play a CD, normally you would turn on the components, select the CD input, and press the play button to start playback. The Macro feature lets you perform all those operations by simply pressing the CD macro button. The macro buttons (the input selector buttons, Å and ı buttons, SYSTEM POWER and STANDBY) are factory set with macro programs. You can also program your own macros (see pages 41 and 42). Press one of the macro buttons Automatically transmits signals of each button sequentially CD SYSTEM CD POWER Macro buttons PLAY (CD area) Second Third PHONO First PHONO – V-AUX V-AUX – TUNER TUNER – (*4) MD/TAPE MD/TAPE PLAY (MD/TAPE area) (*3) CD-R CD-R PLAY CD CD PLAY D-TV/LD D-TV/LD – CBL/SAT – (CD-R area) (*3) (CD area) (*3) SYSTEM POWER CBL/SAT (*1) VCR 1 VCR 1 VCR2/DVR VCR2/DVR DVD DVD PLAY PLAY (VCR 1 area) (*3) (VCR 2/DVR area) (*3) PLAY (DVD area) (*3) A – – B – – SYSTEM POWER POWER STANDBY (D-TV/LD area) (*2) STANDBY – – – *1 In order to turn on some components (including YAMAHA components) connected to this unit, connect those components to the AC OUTLETS on the rear panel. (Power control may not be synchronized with this unit depending on the component. For details, please refer to the operation instruction for the connected component.) *2 If the macro you select includes power control functions, the component may be turned off if it is already on when you press the macro button. For example, if your TV is on and you press the SYSTEM POWER macro button, the TV is turned off. *3 Playback can be started with any YAMAHA remote control-compatible MD recorders, CD players, CD recorders, DVD players, and LD players. When using macros to operate other components, it is either necessary to program the PLAY button on the control area of that component (see page 39) or to set up a manufacturer code (see page 38). *4 When TUNER is selected as the input source, this unit receives the last station when this unit is set in the standby mode. 40 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ■ Operating the macro MACRO TRANSMIT RE-NAME CLEAR 1 2 MACRO OFF ON POWER STANDBY A B V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD MACRO MACRO ON/OFF PHONO Macro buttons Set MACRO ON/OFF to ON. A B V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD PHONO Press a macro button. Notes You can program your own macros and use the Macro feature to transmit many remote control commands by pressing a single button. Notes • If you want to change the source component, use SOURCE SELECT k / n or input selector buttons. When you use the input selector buttons, selecting the input is programmed as a macro step, whereas SOURCE SELECT k / n only changes the component. 3 Press the buttons of the functions that you want to include in the macro operation sequence in order. y • You can set up to 10 steps (10 functions). After you have set 10 steps, “FULL” appears and the remote control automatically exits from the macro mode. SYSTEM POWER STANDBY A B V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD PHONO ADVANCED OPERATION 6CH INPUT TITLE ENTER SOURCE DISPLAY SELECT POWER SEARCH REC SOUND MENU STOP – CHAPTER PAUSE + PLAY 1 2 MCR 1 : DVD a MCR 2 : DVD p ADDITIONAL INFORMATION • The factory-set macro is not cleared when a new macro is programmed for a button. The factory-set macro can be used again when the programmed macro is cleared. • It is not possible to add a new signal (macro step) to the factory-set macro. Programming a macro changes all macro contents. • A macro programming is used to transmit learning or setup (or YAMAHA preset) button signals of this remote control to a macro button. If necessary, set up the manufacturer code or program a function with the remote control for your component. • This remote control handles button signals that operate continuously, such as volume control, as short time interval codes. Macro programming that include these types of macro steps are therefore not recommended. y indicate the number of macro steps you entered Press MACRO by using a ballpoint pen or similar object. “MCR ?” appears in the display window. appear alternately so that you can set up the next step MACRO Note • “NG” appears in the display window when programming has not been done correctly. In this case, start over from step 2. APPENDIX Note • If you do not press any button within 30 seconds during steps 2 and 3, the macro programming process is canceled. If this happens, start over from step 1. BASIC OPERATION ■ Programming a macro Note • “AGAIN” appears in the display window when a button other than the macro buttons is pressed. PREPARATION • When you have finished using the Macro feature, set MACRO ON/OFF to OFF. • While this unit is carrying out a macro program, this unit does not receive any other button’s function until the macro operation has been completed (the TRANSMIT indicator stops flashing). • Continue to aim the remote control at the component the macro is operating until the macro operation has been completed. 1 Press a macro button for which you want to program the macro operation. The button you chose for programming the macro operation and the selected component name appear alternately in the display window. INTRODUCTION SYSTEM LEARN 2 English 41 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES 4 Press MACRO again when the operation sequence you want to program is complete. y MACRO • If you continuously want to rename another source component, press ENTER and repeat steps 1, 3 and 4. 5 Note • “ERROR” appears in the display window under the following circumstances: – when pressing more than one button at once; or – when MACRO ON/OFF is switched to another position. Memory back-up If the remote control is without batteries for more than 3 minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the remote control, the contents of the memory may be cleared. When the memory is cleared, insert new batteries, set up the manufacturer code and program any acquired functions that may have been cleared. RE-NAME Clearing Learned Functions, Macros, Renamed Source Names, and Setup Manufacturer Codes 1 Changing the Source Name in the Display Window You can change the name that appears in the display window on the remote control if you want to use the different name from the original input selector button names. This is useful when different component is set in the input selector button. 1 2 3 Press an input selector button, Å or ı to select the source component you want to rename. The selected component name appears in the display window. A B V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD PHONO Press RE-NAME by using a ballpoint pen or similar object. RE-NAME Press k / n to select and enter a character. Pressing n changes the character in the following order: A to Z, a to z, 0 to 9, space, - (hyphen) and / (slash). (Pressing k goes in the reverse order.) ENTER 4 Press l / h to move the cursor to the next position. ENTER 42 Press RE-NAME again to exit from the renaming mode. 2 Press an input selector button, Å or ı to select the source component you want to clear the function, Macros, renamed source names or manufacturer codes. The selected component name appears in the display window. A B V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD PHONO Press CLEAR by using a ballpoint pen or similar object. CLEAR Note • If you do not press any button within 30 seconds after step 2, the clearing process is canceled. If this happen, start over from step 1. REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES 3 Press k / n to select the clear mode. The mode is shown in the display window in the following order: You can clear the function learned in a certain programmable button in each area. ■ To clear a learned function 1 Clears all learned functions for this unit control area. Clears all learned functions. Clears all programmed macros. 2 B TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD Press LEARN by using a ballpoint pen or similar object. “LEARN” and the selected component name appear alternately in the display window. Clears all programmed functions including setup manufacturer codes. This returns to the factory settings. Press and hold CLEAR again for about 3 seconds. “C:OK” appears in the display window. LEARN Note • If you do not press any button within 30 seconds after step 2, the clearing process is canceled. If this happens, start over from step 2. 3 CLEAR CLEAR Note • “C:NG” appears in the display window if the operation is unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 2. 5 CLEAR Note LEARN ■ To clear the macro function 1 Press an input selector button, Å or ı to select the source component for which you want to clear the function. The selected component name appears in the display window. A B V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD PHONO English • “ERROR” appears in the display window under the following circumstances: – when pressing a button other than the cursor and ENTER; – when pressing more than one button at once; or – when MACRO ON/OFF, 10KEY/DSP or PARAMETER/SET MENU is switched to another position. Press LEARN again to exit from the learning mode. APPENDIX Press CLEAR to exit from the clearing mode. Once you have cleared a learned function or macro for a button, the button reverts to the factory setting. 4 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Press the button that you want to clear for 3 seconds as pressing CLEAR by using a ballpoint pen or similar object. “C:OK” appears in the display window. ADVANCED OPERATION 4 PHONO BASIC OPERATION Clears all renamed source names in the display window. A V-AUX PREPARATION Press an input selector button, Å or ı to select the source component you want to clear the function. The selected component name appears in the display window. INTRODUCTION (L: name of a component) Clears all learned functions for the component area. Press the input selector button, Å or ı to select the component. Clearing a Learned Function or Macro 43 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES 2 Press MACRO to clear a programmed macro by using a ballpoint pen or similar object. MACRO 3 ■ SOURCE SELECT k / n You can control another component independently from the input you have selected by pressing an input selector button. Press SOURCE SELECT k / n to choose the component and set the remote control to be used for it. The display window will show one of the following: (when pressing n) OPTN (option), Å, ı, PHONO, V-AUX, TUNER, MD, CD-R, CD, TV/LD (TV or digital TV/LD), CBSAT (cable TV/satellite tuner), VCR 1, VCR 2, DVD. Press and hold CLEAR by using a ballpoint pen or similar object, and at the same time press the button for which you want to clear the macro for about 3 seconds. “C:OK” appears in the display window. CLEAR y • Pressing k shows the same in the reverse order, but you cannot select OPTN. SOURCE SELECT y • You can clear other learned functions and macros at this time by holding down CLEAR again and pressing the other buttons for which those learned functions or macros have been programmed. OPTN is an extra component control area that can be programmed with other remote control functions. Note • “C:NG” appears in the display window if the operation is unsuccessful. In this case, try step 3 again. 4 ■ OPTN (option) area Press MACRO again to exit from the clearing mode. Once you have cleared a learned function or macro for a button, the button reverts to the factory setting. Note • You cannot set up the manufacturer code in this area. See page 38 for the programming procedure. 6CH INPUT TITLE ENTER SOURCE DISPLAY MACRO SELECT POWER SEARCH REC SOUND MENU STOP – CHAPTER PAUSE + PLAY Pressing n always selects OPTN first 44 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES Each Component Control Area ■ Operating a DVD player (DVD area) SYSTEM POWER STANDBY A B PHONO V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD PREPARATION TITLE 6CH INPUT TITLE Menu cursor/ENTER ENTER MENU DISPLAY SEARCH POWER Return SOURCE SOUND MENU DISPLAY SELECT – SEARCH POWER REC STOP + CHAPTER PAUSE INTRODUCTION The general operational buttons are shown for each area. Some of them may not function depending on the component you have. After setting the manufacturer code, press an input selector button, Å / ı, or SOURCE SELECT k / n to select a component you want to control. Audio Skip PLAY PLAY PAUSE HALL 1 10KEY DSP 6.1/ES HALL 2 JAZZ CLUB 2 3 4 ENTERTAINMENT CONCERT VIDEO TV THEATER 7 8 5 6 MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 9 10 11 12 0 +10 +100 Title/Index CHP/INDEX A/B/C/D/E * CHURCH 1 ROCK CONCERT /DTS SUR. BASIC OPERATION STOP Numeric buttons SELECT Clear PRESET TV INPUT MUTE TV VOL VOLUME CH DISC +/– (disc skip) STEREO TV MUTE DISC EFFECT ■ Operating a VCR (VCR 1 and VCR 2/DVR areas) SYSTEM STANDBY A B PHONO V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD ADDITIONAL INFORMATION POWER 6CH INPUT TITLE ENTER SOURCE SELECT SOUND MENU DISPLAY – SEARCH CHAPTER ADVANCED OPERATION * TV VOL +/–, TV INPUT, and TV MUTE function to operate your TV without switching the input if the manufacturer code is set in D-TV/LD or PHONO. When the manufacturer code for your TV is set up in the both DTV/LD and PHONO areas, priority is given to the signal in the D-TV/LD area. + SEARCH POWER REC STOP PAUSE PLAY PLAY PAUSE 10KEY DSP 6.1/ES TV/Video input HALL 1 HALL 2 JAZZ CLUB 1 2 3 4 ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT CONCERT VIDEO TV THEATER 5 6 7 MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 9 10 11 12 0 +10 +100 CHP/INDEX * CHURCH A/B/C/D/E Numeric buttons 8 SELECT PRESET TV INPUT TV VOL /DTS SUR. APPENDIX POWER Record (Press twice to start recording) STOP MUTE VOLUME CH CH +/– (channel) STEREO TV MUTE EFFECT * TV VOL +/–, TV INPUT, and TV MUTE function to operate your TV without switching the input if the manufacturer code is set in D-TV/LD or PHONO. When the manufacturer code for your TV is set up in the both DTV/LD and PHONO areas, priority is given to the signal in the D-TV/LD area. 45 English DISC REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ■ Operating a TV/digital TV (D-TV/LD area) or a cable TV/satellite TV (CBL/ SAT area) SYSTEM POWER STANDBY A B PHONO V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD 6CH INPUT TITLE ENTER SOURCE DISPLAY SELECT SOUND MENU DISPLAY – SEARCH POWER REC STOP CHAPTER + PAUSE PLAY CHURCH JAZZ CLUB POWER HALL 1 10KEY DSP 6.1/ES Enter TV INPUT CHP/INDEX TV VOL +/– TV VOL HALL 2 1 2 3 4 ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT CONCERT VIDEO TV THEATER 5 6 7 8 MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 9 10 11 12 0 +10 +100 A/B/C/D/E /DTS SUR. * Numeric buttons SELECT PRESET TV INPUT MUTE VOLUME CH CH +/– (channel) STEREO TV MUTE DISC EFFECT TV MUTE * SEARCH, REC, STOP, PAUSE and PLAY function to operate your VCR without switching the input to VCR 1 if the manufacturer code is set in VCR 1. ■ Operating an LD player (D-TV/LD area) SYSTEM POWER STANDBY A B PHONO V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD 6CH INPUT TITLE ENTER SOURCE DISPLAY SELECT SOUND MENU DISPLAY – SEARCH CHAPTER CHAPTER –/+ (chapter search) SEARCH POWER POWER STOP SOUND + 10KEY DSP 6.1/ES Chapter/Time REC STOP HALL 1 HALL 2 PLAY CHURCH JAZZ CLUB 1 2 3 4 ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT CONCERT VIDEO TV THEATER 5 6 7 8 MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 9 10 11 12 0 +10 +100 CHP/INDEX A/B/C/D/E * PAUSE Numeric buttons SELECT Clear PRESET TV INPUT TV VOL /DTS SUR. PLAY PAUSE MUTE VOLUME CH STEREO TV MUTE DISC EFFECT Set the manufacture code for your LD player following the setting procedure described on page 38 because TV is factory-set for this input selector button. * TV VOL +/–, TV INPUT, and TV MUTE function to operate your TV without switching the input if the manufacturer code is set in PHONO. 46 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ■ Operating a CD player (CD area) SYSTEM STANDBY A B PHONO V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD INTRODUCTION POWER 6CH INPUT TITLE ENTER SOURCE DISPLAY SELECT SOUND MENU DISPLAY – SEARCH + CHAPTER SEARCH Skip REC STOP PAUSE PLAY PLAY PAUSE HALL 1 10KEY DSP 6.1/ES INDEX PREPARATION POWER POWER STOP HALL 2 JAZZ CLUB 2 3 4 ENTERTAINMENT CONCERT VIDEO TV THEATER 5 6 7 8 MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 9 10 11 12 0 +10 +100 CHP/INDEX * CHURCH 1 ROCK CONCERT A/B/C/D/E /DTS SUR. Numeric buttons SELECT Clear PRESET TV INPUT MUTE VOLUME CH DISC +/– (disc skip) STEREO TV MUTE DISC EFFECT * TV VOL +/–, TV INPUT, and TV MUTE function to operate your TV without switching the input if the manufacturer code is set in D-TV/LD or PHONO. When the manufacturer code for your TV is set up in the both DTV/LD and PHONO areas, priority is given to the signal in the D-TV/LD area. BASIC OPERATION TV VOL ■ Operating a CD recorder (CD-R area) or an MD recorder (MD/TAPE area) STANDBY A B PHONO V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD ADVANCED OPERATION SYSTEM POWER 6CH INPUT TITLE ENTER DISPLAY SELECT SOUND MENU DISPLAY – SEARCH CHAPTER + Skip SEARCH POWER Record (MD only) POWER 10KEY DSP STOP INDEX (CD-R only) ADDITIONAL INFORMATION SOURCE 6.1/ES REC STOP HALL 1 HALL 2 PLAY CHURCH JAZZ CLUB 1 2 3 4 ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT CONCERT VIDEO TV THEATER 5 6 7 8 MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 9 10 11 12 0 +10 +100 CHP/INDEX Numeric buttons SELECT Clear (CD-R only) PRESET TV INPUT TV VOL /DTS SUR. PLAY PAUSE APPENDIX A/B/C/D/E * PAUSE MUTE VOLUME CH STEREO TV MUTE DISC EFFECT * TV VOL +/–, TV INPUT, and TV MUTE function to operate your TV without switching the input if the manufacturer code is set in D-TV/LD or PHONO. When the manufacturer code for your TV is set up in the both DTV/LD and PHONO areas, priority is given to the signal in the D-TV/LD area. English 47 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ■ Operating a tape deck (MD/TAPE area) SYSTEM POWER STANDBY A B PHONO V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD 6CH INPUT TITLE Display ENTER SOURCE SEARCH (backward/forward) POWER Record SELECT – SEARCH REC 6.1/ES STOP HALL 1 10KEY DSP HALL 2 PAUSE PLAY CHURCH JAZZ CLUB 1 2 3 4 ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT CONCERT VIDEO TV THEATER 5 6 7 8 MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 9 10 11 12 0 +10 +100 CHP/INDEX A/B/C/D/E /DTS SUR. PLAY PAUSE Numeric button (MD only) SELECT PRESET TV INPUT * A/B + CHAPTER Direction A/B POWER STOP INDEX (MD only) SOUND MENU DISPLAY MUTE TV VOL VOLUME CH STEREO TV MUTE DISC EFFECT * TV VOL +/–, TV INPUT, and TV MUTE function to operate your TV without switching the input if the manufacturer code is set in D-TV/LD or PHONO. When the manufacturer code for your TV is set up in the both DTV/LD and PHONO areas, priority is given to the signal in the D-TV/LD area. ■ Operating a tuner (TUNER area) SYSTEM POWER STANDBY A B PHONO V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD 6CH INPUT TITLE ENTER SOURCE POWER POWER 10KEY DSP 6.1/ES – SEARCH REC STOP HALL 1 HALL 2 CHAPTER + PAUSE PLAY CHURCH JAZZ CLUB 1 2 3 4 ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT CONCERT VIDEO TV THEATER 7 8 5 6 MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 9 10 11 12 0 +10 +100 CHP/INDEX A/B/C/D/E TV VOL /DTS SUR. SELECT MUTE VOLUME CH STEREO TV MUTE DISC EFFECT * These buttons function when the manufacturer code “Yama2” is set up. 48 Preset number 1 to 8 * PRESET TV INPUT Preset group A/B/C/D/E SOUND MENU DISPLAY SELECT PRESET +/– REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ■ Operating the component set in Å or ı YAMAHA LD player is factory-set in Å and satellite tuner in ı. However if you want to set other component, set the manufacturer code for the component you want to set in the Å / ı button following the manufacturer code setting procedure described on page 38. SYSTEM STANDBY A B PHONO V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD PREPARATION POWER 6CH INPUT TITLE ENTER SOURCE DISPLAY SELECT POWER 10KEY DSP 6.1/ES – SEARCH REC STOP HALL 1 HALL 2 CHAPTER + PAUSE PLAY CHURCH JAZZ CLUB 1 2 3 4 ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT CONCERT VIDEO TV THEATER 5 6 7 MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 9 10 11 12 0 +10 +100 CHP/INDEX A/B/C/D/E 8 SELECT PRESET TV INPUT TV VOL /DTS SUR. BASIC OPERATION The functions of these buttons in the component control area differ for the component you set in Å or ı. SOUND MENU INTRODUCTION These buttons are not input selector buttons but simply provide the space for an extra component to control with this unit’s remote control without making connection to this unit. The white buttons area shown below can be used for the component set in Å and ı, and the function for each button differs depending on the component. MUTE VOLUME CH STEREO TV MUTE DISC EFFECT ADVANCED OPERATION ADDITIONAL INFORMATION APPENDIX English 49 ADVANCED OPERATION SET MENU The SET MENU consists of 14 items including the speaker mode setting, center graphic equalizer and parameter initialization features. Choose the appropriate item and adjust or select the values as necessary. y Adjusting the Items on the SET MENU Adjustment should be made with the remote control. • You can adjust the items on the SET MENU while playing a source. • We recommend that you adjust the items on the SET MENU while using a video monitor. It is easier to see the video monitor than it is to see the front panel display on this unit while adjusting the items. 5 10KEY DSP HALL 1 HALL 2 1 ROCK CONCERT 6.1/ES 4 TV THEATER 9 10 11 12 0 +10 +100 A/B/C/D/E 7 /DTS SUR. 8 SELECT PRESET TV INPUT TV VOL MUTE VOLUME CH STEREO TV MUTE DISC Note JAZZ CLUB 3 CONCERT VIDEO 6 MOVIE THEATER 2 CHP/INDEX 2,3,5 3,4 CHURCH 2 ENTERTAINMENT 5 MOVIE THEATER 1 EFFECT PARAMETER ON SCREEN LEVEL SLEEP TEST SET MENU 1 • The indication on the front panel display is the abbreviation of the OSD. 1 SPEAKER SET 1A CENTER SP 1B MAIN SP Note • Some items require extra steps to change to the desired setting. 1 Set PARAMETER/SET MENU to SET MENU. PARAMETER SET MENU 1C REAR L/R SP 1D REAR CT SP 2 1E LFE/BASS OUT Press k / n repeatedly to select the item (1 to 14) you want to adjust. 1F MAIN LEVEL 2 LOW FRQ TEST 3 L/R BALANCE 4 HP TONE CTRL 5 CENTER GEQ 6 INPUT RENAME 7 I/O ASSIGNMENT 7A CMPNT-V INPUT 7B OPTICAL OUT 7C OPTICAL IN 7D COAXIAL IN 8 INPUT MODE 9 PARAM. INI 10 LFE LEVEL 11 D-RANGE 12 SP DELAY TIME 13 DISPLAY SET 14 MEMORY GUARD 50 SET MENU 1/4 1 ≥ 2 3 4 3 SPEAKER SET LOW FRQ TEST L/R BALANCE HP TONE CTRL / : Up/Down -/+ : Enter Press –/+ once to enter the setup mode of the selected item. The last setting you adjusted appears on the video monitor or on the front panel display. 2 LOW FRQ TEST ≥ TEST TONE………OFF OUTPUT…MAIN L/R FRQ……………………88Hz Depending on the item, press k / n to select a sub item. 2 LOW FRQ TEST TEST TONE………OFF ≥ OUTPUT…MAIN L/R FRQ……………………88Hz SET MENU 4 Press –/+ repeatedly to change the setting of the item. Use this feature to select suitable output modes for your speaker configuration. Notes 5 10KEY DSP or HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB 1 2 3 4 ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT CONCERT VIDEO TV THEATER 5 6 7 MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 9 10 11 12 0 +10 +100 /DTS SUR. 8 SELECT By adding a center speaker to your speaker configuration, this unit can provide good dialog localization for many listeners and superior synchronization of sound and images. The OSD shows a large, small or no center speaker depending on how you set this item. Choices: LRG (large), SML (small), NONE Initial setting: LRG LRG Select this if you have a large center speaker. The entire range of the center channel signal is directed to the center speaker. BASIC OPERATION Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode. However if the power cord is disconnected from the AC outlet, or the power supply is cut for more than one week, the stored data will be lost. If so, adjust the items again. ■ 1A CENTER SP (center speaker mode) PREPARATION Press k / n repeatedly until the current DSP program appears or simply press one of the DSP program group buttons to exit from the SET MENU. • When 96-kHz sampling digital signals are input to this unit, level adjustments in items 1B,1E and 1F are possible, but those in items 1A,1C and 1D are not affected. • When 6CH INPUT is selected as the input source, level adjustments in items 1A through 1E are not affected. INTRODUCTION 2 LOW FRQ TEST ≥ TEST TONE…………ON OUTPUT…MAIN L/R FRQ……………………88Hz 1 SPEAKER SET (speaker mode settings) 1A CENTER SP ADVANCED OPERATION LRG SML NONE 1A CENTER SP ADDITIONAL INFORMATION SML Select this if you have a small center speaker. The lowfrequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the center channel are directed to the speakers selected with “1E LFE/BASS OUT”. LRG SML NONE APPENDIX NONE Select this if you do not have a center speaker. All of the center channel signal are directed to the left and right main speakers. 1A CENTER SP English LRG SML NONE 51 SET MENU ■ 1B MAIN SP (main speaker mode) The OSD shows large or small main speakers depending on how you set this item. Choices: LARGE, SMALL Initial setting: LARGE LARGE Select this if you have large main speakers. The entire range of the left and right main channel signal is directed to the left and right main speakers. 1B MAIN SP ■ 1C REAR L/R SP (rear speaker mode) The OSD shows large, small or no rear speakers depending on how you set this item. Choices: LRG (large), SML (small), NONE Initial setting: LRG LRG Select this if you have large left and right rear speakers or if a rear subwoofer is connected to the rear speakers. The entire range of the rear channel signal is directed to the left and right rear speakers. 1C REAR L/R SP LARGE SMALL SMALL Select this if you have small main speakers. The lowfrequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the main channel are directed to the speakers selected with “1E LFE/BASS OUT”. 1B MAIN SP LRG SML NONE SML Select this if you have small left and right rear speakers. The low-frequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the rear channel are directed to the speakers selected with “1E LFE/BASS OUT”. 1C REAR L/R SP LARGE SMALL Note • When you select MAIN for “1E LFE/BASS OUT”, the lowfrequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the main channel are directed to the main speakers even if you select SMALL for the main speaker mode. LRG SML NONE NONE Select this if you do not have rear speakers. 1C REAR L/R SP LRG SML NONE y • This unit is set in the virtual CINEMA DSP mode by selecting NONE for “1C REAR L/R SP”. 52 SET MENU ■ 1E LFE/BASS OUT (bass out mode) By adding a rear center speaker to your speaker configuration, this unit can provide more realistic frontto-back and transitions. LFE signals carry low-frequency effects when this unit decodes a Dolby Digital or DTS signal. Low-frequency signals are defined as 90 Hz and below. The Lowfrequency signals are directed to both main right and left speakers, and the subwoofer (subwoofer can be used for both stereo reproduction and the DSP program). Choices: LRG (large), SML (small), NONE Initial setting: LRG 1D REAR CT SP Choices: SWFR (subwoofer), MAIN, BOTH Initial setting: BOTH SWFR Select this if you use a subwoofer. The LFE signals are directed to the subwoofer. 1E LFE/BASS OUT LRG SML NONE SWFR MAIN BOTH MAIN Select this if you do not use a subwoofer. The LFE signals are directed to the main speakers. 1E LFE/BASS OUT LRG SML NONE SWFR MAIN BOTH NONE Select this if you do not have a rear center speaker. All of the rear center channel signal are directed to the left and right rear speakers. BOTH Select this if you use a subwoofer and you want to mix the main channel low-frequency signals with the LFE signals. 1E LFE/BASS OUT LRG SML NONE SWFR MAIN BOTH ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 1D REAR CT SP ADVANCED OPERATION 1D REAR CT SP BASIC OPERATION SML Select this if you have a small rear center speaker. The low-frequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the rear center channel are directed to the speakers selected with “1E LFE/BASS OUT”. PREPARATION LRG Select this if you have a large rear center speaker. The entire range of the rear center channel signal is directed to the rear center speaker. INTRODUCTION ■ 1D REAR CT SP (rear center speaker mode) Note APPENDIX • The low-frequency signals (90 Hz and below) from all main, center, rear and rear center channels are directed to the LFE channel when you select the small speaker setting in items 1A, 1B, 1C and 1D. English 53 SET MENU ■ 1F MAIN LEVEL (main level mode) Change this setting if you cannot match the output level of the center, rear (L/R) and rear center speakers with the main speakers because of the unusually high-efficiency performance of the main speakers. Choices: Normal, –10 dB Initial setting: Normal 2 LOW FRQ TEST Use this feature to adjust the output level of the subwoofer so it matches that of the other speakers in your configuration. Change the setting with the remote control while sitting in the listening position. 1 Press –/+ to set “TEST TONE” to ON, and adjust the volume with VOLUME +/– so you can hear the tone. Normal Select this if you can match the output level of your effect speakers with that of your main speakers when using the test tone. 2 LOW FRQ TEST ≥ TEST TONE…………ON OUTPUT…MAIN L/R FRQ……………………88Hz 1F MAIN LEVEL Notes Normal -10dB –10 dB Select this if you cannot match the output level of your effect speakers with that of your main speakers when using the test tone. • Do not turn up the volume too high. • If no test tone is heard, turn down the volume, set this unit in the standby mode and make sure all the necessary connections are correct. 2 1F MAIN LEVEL Normal -10dB Press n to go to “OUTPUT” and press –/+ to select the speaker you want to compare with the subwoofer. If SWFR is selected, the test tone above 90 Hz will not be output from the subwoofer. The test tone will not necessarily be output from the selected speakers. The output mode of the test tone depends on the settings of “1 SPEAKER SET” on the SET MENU. 2 LOW FRQ TEST TEST TONE………OFF ≥ OUTPUT…MAIN L/R FRQ……………………88Hz 3 Press n to go to “FRQ” and press –/+ to select the frequency you want to use. 2 LOW FRQ TEST TEST TONE………OFF OUTPUT…MAIN L/R ≥ FRQ……………………88Hz 54 SET MENU 4 Adjust the volume of the subwoofer with the controls on the subwoofer so it matches that of the speaker you are comparing it to. Digital generator (wide band noise produced) Freq. Center freq. 35 Hz – 250 Hz Control range (dB): –6 to +3 for both BASS and TRBL (treble) Initial setting: 0 dB for both BASS and TRBL (treble) 4 HP TONE CTRL ≥ BASS TRBL Use this feature to adjust the built-in 5-band graphic equalizer so that the center speaker tonal quality matches that of the left and right main speakers. You can select the 100 Hz, 300 Hz, 1 kHz, 3 kHz, or 10 kHz frequencies. Control range (dB): –6 to +6 Initial setting: 0 dB for 5-band - Control range: 10 steps for L/R Initial setting: 0 dB for L/R Press –/+ to adjust the level of that frequency. 5 CENTER GEQ 100Hz ≥ 300Hz 1kHz 3kHz 10kHz Press + to decrease the output level for the left main speaker. Press – for the right main speaker. - +3dB + y 55 English • You can monitor the center speaker sound while adjusting this item by using the test tone. Press TEST before starting the foregoing procedure. “TEST DOLBY SUR.” appears on the video monitor, and the test tone starts alternating among the speakers. Once you begin this procedure, the test tone remains at the center speaker and you can hear how the sound changes as you adjust the various frequency levels. To stop the test tone, press TEST (see pages 22 and 23). APPENDIX -/+ : Adjust / : Exit + ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 2 0dB ADVANCED OPERATION ≥ 100Hz 300Hz 1kHz 3kHz 10kHz 3 L/R BALANCE (balance of the left and right main speakers) L …………………… ……………………R 0 Press n to select a higher frequency and k to select a lower frequency. 5 CENTER GEQ Band pass filter 3 L/R BALANCE 0dB 5 CENTER GEQ (center graphic equalizer) 1 Use this feature to adjust the balance of the output level from the left and right main speakers. + - BASIC OPERATION Noise Use this feature to adjust the level of the bass and treble when you use your headphones. PREPARATION The test tone is produced by the tone generator. The tone generator produces a narrow-band noise centered on a specified frequency by the band pass filter. You can change this center frequency from 35 Hz through 250 Hz in one-sixth octave steps. You can use the test tone not only for adjusting the subwoofer level, but also for checking the low-frequency characteristics of your listening room. Low-frequency sounds are especially affected by the listener’s position, speaker placement, subwoofer polarity and other conditions. INTRODUCTION ■ About the test tone 4 HP TONE CTRL (headphone tone control) SET MENU 6 INPUT RENAME Use this feature to change the name of the input which appears on the OSD or the front panel display. 1 Press an input selector button (or use INPUT l / h) to select the input you want to change the name of. 6 INPUT RENAME DVD ≥ DVD -/+ : Position / : Character 2 Press –/+ to place the _ (under-bar) under the space or the character you want to edit. 6 INPUT RENAME DVD ≥ DVD 7 I/O ASSIGNMENT It is possible to assign jacks according to the component to be used if this unit’s COMPONENT VIDEO input jack or DIGITAL INPUT/OUTPUT jack settings (component names for jacks) differ from that component. This makes it possible to change the jack assignment and effectively connect more component. Once you assign, you can select that component with INPUT l / h (the input selector buttons on the remote control). ■ 7A CMPNT-V INPUT for COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT jacks [A] and [B] Choices: [A] DVD, V-AUX, VCR 2/DVR, VCR 1, CBL/SAT, D-TV/LD [B] D-TV/LD, DVD, V-AUX, VCR 2/ DVR, VCR 1, CBL/SAT Initial settings: [A] DVD [B] D-TV/LD -/+ : Position / : Character 7A CMPNT-V INPUT ≥ [A]…………… DVD [B]……………D-TV/LD 3 Press k / n to select the character you want to use and –/+ to move to the next one. • Press n to change the character in the following order, or press k to go in the reverse order. A to Z, a space, 0 to 9, a space, a to z, a space, #, *, +, and so on. • Follow the foregoing procedure to rename other inputs. 6 INPUT RENAME DVD ≥ DVD1 -/+ : Position / : Character ■ 7B OPTICAL OUT for OPTICAL OUTPUT jacks (1) and (2) Choices: (1) MD/TAPE, CD-R, CD, PHONO, V-AUX, VCR 2/DVR, VCR 1, CBL/ SAT, D-TV/LD, DVD, TUNER (2) CD-R, CD, PHONO, V-AUX, VCR 2/ DVR, VCR 1, CBL/SAT, D-TV/LD, DVD, MD/TAPE, TUNER Initial settings: (1) MD/TAPE (2) CD-R 7B OPTICAL OUT ≥ (1)……………MD/TAPE (2)…………… CD-R Note • You can use up to 8 characters to rename the inputs. 4 56 Press + repeatedly to exit from INPUT RENAME. SET MENU ■ 7C OPTICAL IN for OPTICAL INPUT jacks (3) to (6) Choices: AUTO LAST -/+ : Select / : Exit Choices: AUTO, LAST Initial setting: AUTO AUTO Select this to allow this unit to automatically detect the type of input signal and select the appropriate input mode. LAST Select this to set this unit to automatically select the last input mode used for that source. ■ 7D COAXIAL IN for COAXIAL INPUT jacks (7) and (8) (7) CD, PHONO, V-AUX, VCR 2/DVR, VCR 1, CBL/SAT, D-TV/LD, DVD, MD/TAPE, CD-R, TUNER (8) CBL/SAT, D-TV/LD, DVD, MD/ TAPE, CD-R, CD, PHONO, V-AUX, VCR 2/DVR, VCR 1, TUNER Initial settings: (7) CD (8) CBL/SAT ADVANCED OPERATION Choices: BASIC OPERATION (3)…………… CD (4)…………… CD-R ≥ (5)…………… DVD (6)……………D-TV/LD 8 INPUT MODE PREPARATION 7C OPTICAL IN Use this feature to designate the input mode for sources connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on this unit (see page 26 for details about the input mode). INTRODUCTION (3) CD, PHONO, VCR 2/DVR, VCR 1, CBL/SAT, D-TV/LD, DVD, MD/ TAPE, CD-R, TUNER (4) CD-R, CD, PHONO, VCR 2/DVR, VCR 1, CBL/SAT, D-TV/LD, DVD, MD/TAPE, TUNER (5) DVD, MD/TAPE, CD-R, CD, PHONO, VCR 2/DVR, VCR 1, CBL/ SAT, D-TV/LD, TUNER (6) D-TV/LD, DVD, MD/TAPE, CD-R, CD, PHONO, VCR 2/DVR, VCR 1, CBL/SAT, TUNER Initial settings: (3) CD (4) CD-R (5) DVD (6) D-TV/LD 8 INPUT MODE (initial input mode) ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 7D COAXIAL IN (7)…………… CD ≥ (8)………CBL/SAT Note APPENDIX • You cannot select an item more than once for the same type of jack. English 57 SET MENU 9 PARAM. INI (parameter initialization) Use this feature to initialize the parameters for each DSP program within a DSP program group. When you initialize a DSP program group, all of the parameter values within that group revert to their initial settings. Press the corresponding numeric button for the DSP program that you want to initialize. The asterisk (*) next to the program number means that the parameter values have been changed. 9 PARAM. INI 1 2 3 *4 *5 6 7 8 9 *10 Press 10 LFE LEVEL This setting is effective only when this unit decodes Dolby Digital or DTS signals. Use this feature to adjust the output level of the LFE (low-frequency effect) channel when playing back a Dolby Digital or DTS signal. The LFE signal carries the low-frequency special effect sound which is only added to certain scenes. Control range (dB): –20 to 0 for both SPEAKER and HEADPHONE Initial setting: 0 dB for both SPEAKER and HEADPHONE 1 Press k / n to select the item to be adjusted. 11 No. Key 10 LFE LEVEL ≥ SPEAKER………………0dB HEADPHONE…………0dB Notes • You cannot initialize the individual DSP programs within a group separately. • The parameter values of the DSP programs do not change if you initialize a program group that does not have the asterisk mark (*). • When “14 MEMORY GUARD” is set to ON (see page 60), you cannot initialize any program groups. • Once you initialize a DSP program group, you cannot automatically revert to the previous parameter settings. 2 Press –/+ to adjust the LFE level. 10 LFE LEVEL ≥ SPEAKER…………-11dB HEADPHONE…………0dB Note • Adjust the LFE level according to the capacity of your subwoofer or headphones. 58 SET MENU 11 D-RANGE (dynamic range) 11 D-RANGE ≥ SP: MAX STD MIN HP: MAX STD MIN STD Select the “STD” (Standard) setting for general use. Control range: 0 to 5 ms for CENTER 0 to 30 ms for REAR CENTER Initial setting: 0 ms for CENTER 3 ms for REAR CENTER Press –/+ to increase or decrease the delay of the center and the rear center channel sounds. ADVANCED OPERATION 12 SP DELAY TIME BASIC OPERATION MIN Select the “MIN” setting for listening to sources at extremely low volume levels. PREPARATION MAX Select the “MAX” setting for feature films. Use this feature to adjust the delay of the Center and the Rear Center channel sounds. This feature works when this unit decodes DTS or Dolby Digital signals. Ideally, the Center speaker and the Rear Center speaker should be the same distance from the main listening position as the left and right Main speakers. However, in most home situations, the Center speaker or the Rear Center speaker is placed in line with the Main speakers or the Rear speakers. By delaying the sound from the Center speaker and the Rear Center speaker, the apparent distance from the Center speaker and the Rear Center speaker to the main listening position can be adjusted to make it seem the same as the distance between the left and right Main speaker, and the left and right Rear speakers to the listening position. Adjusting the delay time for the Center speaker is especially important for giving depth to the dialogue. INTRODUCTION Use this feature to adjust the dynamic range. This setting is effective only when this unit decodes Dolby Digital signals. 12 SP DELAY TIME ≥ CENTER…………………0ms REAR CNTR…………3ms Center speaker image ADDITIONAL INFORMATION C L R RC RR APPENDIX RL C RC y • Increasing the delay by 1 ms simulates moving the speakers about 30 cm (one foot) farther away from the listening position. English 59 SET MENU 13 DISPLAY SET 13 DISPLAY SET ≥ BLUE BACK………AUTO OSD SHIFT………………0 DIMMER………………………0 14 MEMORY GUARD Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to DSP program parameter values and other settings on this unit. Choices: ON, OFF Initial setting: OFF 14 MEMORY GUARD ■ BLUE BACK Selecting AUTO for the on-screen display setting displays a blue background when there’s no video signal input. Nothing is displayed on the screen including the onscreen display if OFF is selected. Choices: AUTO, OFF Initial setting: AUTO ■ OSD SHIFT (OSD off-set position) This setting is used to adjust the vertical position of the OSD. Control range: +5 (downward) to –5 (upward) Initial setting: 0 Press + to lower the position of the OSD. Press – to raise the position of the OSD. ■ DIMMER You can adjust the brightness of the front panel display. Control range: –4 to 0 Initial setting: 0 60 OFF ON -/+ : Select / : Exit Select ON to protect the following features: • DSP program parameters • All SET MENU items • Center, rear speakers, rear center, and subwoofer levels • The on-screen display (OSD) mode Notes • When “14 MEMORY GUARD” is set to ON, you cannot use the test tone. • When “14 MEMORY GUARD” is set to ON, you cannot select any other SET MENU items. ADJUSTING THE LEVEL OF THE EFFECT SPEAKERS 3 Adjustment should be made with the remote control. A/B/C/D/E PRESET TV INPUT TV VOL MUTE STEREO DISC EFFECT PARAMETER ON SCREEN LEVEL SLEEP TEST SET MENU 1 y Set PARAMETER/SET MENU to PARAMETER. PARAMETER SET MENU Press LEVEL repeatedly to select the speaker(s) you want to adjust. Each time you press LEVEL, the selected speaker changes and appears on the front panel display as follows: center, right rear, rear center, left rear and subwoofer. LEVEL • When the speaker output modes for “1A CENTER SP” and “1C REAR L/R SP” are set to NONE, and “1E LFE/BASS OUT” to MAIN, the output level of those speakers cannot be adjusted because there is no sound coming from these speakers. • When you adjust the output level with LEVEL, the settings you made with the test tone will be changed. • It is recommended to adjust the speakers (except for a subwoofer) by following the steps described in Using the Test Tone on pages 22 and 23. Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode. However if the power cord is disconnected from the AC outlet, or the power supply is cut for more than one week, the stored data will be lost. If so, set the output level again. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Right rear speaker output level ADVANCED OPERATION Center speaker output level Notes BASIC OPERATION 2 • When PARAMETER/SET MENU is set to SET MENU, you cannot adjust the output level by using LEVEL. However, each time you press LEVEL, the current level of each speaker appears on the front panel display and you can check the speaker level. PREPARATION 1 VOLUME CH TV MUTE 2 3 Press –/+ to adjust the speaker output level. • The control range for the center, left and right rear or rear center speakers is from +10 dB to –10 dB. • The control range for the subwoofer is from 0 dB to –20 dB. INTRODUCTION You can adjust the output level of each effect speaker (center, left and right rear, rear center and subwoofer) while listening to a music source. Rear center speaker output level Left rear speaker output level Subwoofer output level APPENDIX y • Once you press LEVEL, you can also select the speaker(s) to be adjusted by pressing n/k. LEVEL English 61 SLEEP TIMER Use this feature to automatically set this unit in the standby mode after the amount of time you have set. The sleep timer is useful when you are going to sleep while this unit is playing or recording a source. The sleep timer also automatically turns off the external components connected to AC OUTLETS. 3 The “SLEEP” indicator soon lights up on the front panel display after the sleep timer has been set. The display then returns to the previous indication. V AUX VCR2/DVR VCR 1 CBL/SAT D TV/LD DVD MD/TAPE CD R TUNER CD PHONO SLEEP VOLUME DSP DIGITAL SP A The sleep timer can only be set with the remote control. CONCERT HALL1 L R y • By connecting a commercially available timer to this unit, you can also set a wake-up timer. Refer to the operation instructions for the timer. Canceling the Sleep Timer Press SLEEP repeatedly until “SLEEP OFF” appears on the front panel display. After a few seconds, “SLEEP OFF” disappears, the “SLEEP” indicator goes off and the display returns to the previous indication. Setting the Sleep Timer 10KEY DSP HALL 1 RE-NAME CLEAR LEARN MACRO OFF B ON TUNER CBL/SAT MD/TAPE VCR 1 CD-R CD VCR2/DVR HALL 2 ROCK CONCERT PHONO 6.1/ES V-AUX D-TV/LD A STANDBY 4 TV THEATER 7 9 10 11 12 0 +10 +100 /DTS SUR. TV INPUT MUTE VOLUME CH STEREO TV MUTE DISC EFFECT ENTER DISPLAY POWER 10KEY DSP 1 ON SCREEN LEVEL SLEEP TEST SOUND MENU SEARCH – y PARAMETER SOURCE SELECT SELECT PRESET TV VOL TITLE SLEEP 8 6 MOVIE THEATER 2 A/B/C/D/E 6CH INPUT JAZZ CLUB 3 CONCERT VIDEO 5 MOVIE THEATER 1 CHP/INDEX 1 DVD CHURCH 2 ENTERTAINMENT 1 MACRO TRANSMIT SYSTEM POWER CHAPTER SET MENU 2 + REC STOP PAUSE PLAY HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB • The sleep timer setting can also be canceled by setting this unit in the standby mode by using STANDBY on the remote control (or STANDBY/ON on the front panel) or by disconnecting the AC power cord from the AC outlet. Select a source and start playback on the source component. PHONO 2 V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD SLEEP Press SLEEP repeatedly to set the amount of time before this unit automatically turns off. Each time you press SLEEP, the front panel display changes as shown below. SLEEP 120 min. SLEEP OFF V AUX VCR2/DVR VCR 1 CBL/SAT SLEEP 90 min. SLEEP 30 min. D TV/LD DVD MD/TAPE CD R SLEEP 60 min. TUNER CD PHONO SLEEP VOLUME DSP DIGITAL SP A 62 SLEEP 120min L R SOUND FIELD PROGRAM PARAMETER EDITING What really creates the rich, full tones of a live instrument are the multiple reflections from the walls of the room. In addition to making the sound “live”, these reflections enable us to tell where the player is situated, and the size and shape of the room in which we are sitting. In any environment, in addition to the direct sound coming straight to our ears from the player’s instrument, there are two distinct types of sound reflections that combine to make up the sound field: If you could create the appropriate early reflections and subsequent reverberations in your listening room, you would be able to create your own listening environment. The acoustics in your room could be changed to those of a concert hall, a dance floor, or virtually any size room at all. This ability to create sound fields at will is exactly what YAMAHA has done with the digital sound field processor. See “Digital Sound Field Parameter Descriptions” on pages 65 to 68. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Direct sound, early reflections and subsequent reverberation taken together help us to determine the subjective size and shape of the room, and it is this information that the digital sound field processor reproduces in order to create sound fields. ADVANCED OPERATION Reverberations These are caused by reflections from more than one surface — walls, ceiling, the back of the room — so numerous that they merge together to form a continuous sonic “afterglow”. They are non-directional, and lessen the clarity of the direct sound. Each DSP program has a set of parameters that allow you to change the characteristics of the acoustic environment to precisely create the effect you want. These parameters correspond to the many natural acoustic factors that create the sound field you experience in an actual concert hall or other listening environment. The size of the room, for example, affects the length of time between the early reflections. The “ROOM SIZE” parameter provided in many of the DSP programs alters the timing between these reflections, thus changing the shape of the “room” you are listening. In addition to room size, the shape of the room and the characteristics of its surfaces have a significant effect on the final sound. Surfaces that absorb sound, for example, cause the reflections and reverberations to die out more quickly, while highly reflective surfaces allow the reflections to carry on for a longer period of time. The digital sound field parameters allow you to control these and many other factors that contribute to your personal sound field, allowing you to essentially “redesign” the concert halls, theaters, etc. provided to create custom-tailored listening environments that ideally match your mood and music. BASIC OPERATION Early reflections Reflected sounds reach our ears extremely rapidly (50 ms – 100 ms after the direct sound), after reflecting from one surface only — for example, from the ceiling or a wall. These reflections fall into specific patterns as shown in the diagram on page 65 for any particular environment, and provide vital information to our ears. Early reflections actually add clarity to the direct sound. DSP programs consist of some parameters to determine the apparent room size, reverberation time, distance from you to the performer, etc. In each program, these parameters are set with values precisely calculated by YAMAHA to create a sound field unique to the program. It is recommended to use DSP programs without changing the values of parameters; however, this unit also allows you to create your own sound fields. Starting with one of the built-in programs, you can adjust those parameters. PREPARATION ■ Elements of a sound field Sound Field Program Parameters INTRODUCTION What is a sound field? APPENDIX English 63 SOUND FIELD PROGRAM PARAMETER EDITING Changing Parameter Settings You can enjoy good quality sound with the factory-set parameters. Although you do not have to change the initial settings, you can change some of the parameters to better suit the input source or your listening room. 4 Press k / n to select the parameter. 5 Press –/+ to change the parameter value. Adjustments should be made with the remote control. y y • We recommended that you edit the parameter while using a video monitor. It is easier to see the video monitor than it is to see the front panel display. • When you set the parameter to a value other than the factoryset value, an asterisk mark (*) appears by the parameter name on the video monitor. 3 10KEY DSP 6.1/ES HALL 1 HALL 2 3 4 CONCERT VIDEO TV THEATER 6 7 9 10 11 12 0 +10 +100 A/B/C/D/E SELECT MUTE VOLUME CH STEREO TV MUTE DISC EFFECT PARAMETER ON SCREEN LEVEL SLEEP TEST SET MENU 1 Set PARAMETER/SET MENU to PARAMETER. PARAMETER Turn on the video monitor and press ON SCREEN repeatedly to select the full display mode. 3 Select a DSP program you want to adjust. HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH ON SCREEN JAZZ CLUB 1 2 3 4 ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT CONCERT VIDEO TV THEATER 5 6 7 8 MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 9 10 11 12 0 +10 +100 Program No. /DTS SUR. SELECT Program name P05 ROCK CONCERT Cursor ≥ Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby mode, the power cord is disconnected from the AC outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to power failure. However, if the power is cut for more than one week, the parameter value you edited will return to the factory setting. If so, edit the parameter value again. SET MENU 2 10KEY DSP Repeat steps 3 to 5 above as necessary to change other program parameters. PRESET TV INPUT TV VOL 1 8 MOVIE THEATER 2 /DTS SUR. 6 JAZZ CLUB 2 ENTERTAINMENT 5 MOVIE THEATER 1 CHP/INDEX 4 2 5 CHURCH 1 ROCK CONCERT Arena INIT.DLY…………22ms ROOM SIZE…………1.0 LIVENESS…………………7 REV.TIME…………3.3s REV.DELAY……240ms Resetting a Parameter to the Factory-set Value ■ To reset some of the parameters to the factory-set values Select the parameter you want to reset. Then press and hold –/+ until the value temporarily stops at the factoryset value. The asterisk mark (*) by the parameter name disappears on the video monitor. ■ To reset all of the parameters to the factory-set values Use “9 PARAM. INI” on the SET MENU to reset all of the parameter values of all DSP programs within the selected group to the factory-set values (see page 58). This operation resets all of the parameter values of all DSP programs within that group to the factory-set values. Notes Parameters Parameter valves Example of the parameter setting display 64 • The available parameters may be displayed on more than one OSD page for some of the programs. To scroll through pages, press k / n. • You cannot change parameter values when “14 MEMORY GUARD” on the SET MENU is set to ON. If you want to change the parameter values, set “14 MEMORY GUARD” to OFF (see page 60). DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS ■ INIT. DLY (Initial Delay) [P. INT. DLY for the presence sound field] Function: Description: Control Range 1 – 99 msec Sound Source Level Level Level Early Reflections Time Time INIT.DLY Time INIT.DLY INIT.DLY BASIC OPERATION Sound Source Reflection Face Small value = 1 ms Large value = 99 ms Description: Control Range 0.1 – 2.0 Time Early Reflections Time Level Level Level Sound Source ADDITIONAL INFORMATION This parameter adjusts the apparent size of the surround sound field. The larger the value, the larger the surround sound field becomes. As the sound is repeatedly reflected around a room, the larger the hall is, the longer the time between the original reflected sound and the subsequent reflections. By controlling the time between the reflected sounds, you can change the apparent size of the virtual venue. Changing this parameter from one to two, doubles the apparent length of the room. ADVANCED OPERATION ■ ROOM SIZE [P. ROOM SIZE for the presence sound field] Function: PREPARATION This parameter changes the apparent distance from the source sound by adjusting the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection heard by the listener. The smaller the value, the closer the sound source seems to the listener. The larger the value, the farther the apparent distance seems. For a small room, this parameter would be set to a small value, and for a large room, it would be set to a large value. INTRODUCTION You can adjust the values of certain digital sound field parameters so the sound fields are recreated accurately in your listening room. Not all of the following parameters are found in every program. Time Sound Source APPENDIX Small value = 0.1 Large value = 2.0 English 65 DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS ■ LIVENESS Function: Description: Control Range 0 – 10 This parameter adjusts the reflectivity of the virtual walls in the hall by changing the rate at which the early reflections decay. The early reflections of a sound source decay much faster in a room with acoustically absorbent wall surfaces than in one which has highly reflective surfaces. A room with acoustically absorbent surfaces is referred to as “dead”, while a room with highly reflective surfaces is referred to as “live”. The LIVENESS parameter lets you adjust the early reflection decay rate, and thus the “liveness” of the room. Sound Source Level Dead Level Level Live Time Time Time Sound Source Small Reflected Sound Large Reflected Sound Small value = 0 ■ S. DELAY (Surround Delay) Function: Large value = 10 Control Range 0 – 49 msec (The range depends on the signal format.) This parameter adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the surround sound. ■ S. INIT. DLY (Surround Initial Delay) Function: This parameter adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection on the surround side of the sound field. You can only adjust this parameter when at least two front channels and two rear channels are used. ■ S. ROOM SIZE (Surround Room Size) Function: Control Range 1 – 49 msec Control Range 0.1 – 2.0 This parameter adjusts the apparent size of the surround sound field. ■ S. LIVENESS (Surround Liveness) Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent reflectivity of the virtual walls in the surround sound field. ■ RC INIT. DLY (Rear Center Initial Delay) Function: 66 Control Range 0.1 – 2.0 This parameter adjusts the apparent size of the rear center sound field. ■ RC LIVENESS (Rear Center Liveness) Function: Control Range 1 – 49 msec This parameter adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection in the rear center sound field. ■ RC ROOM SIZE (Rear Center Room Size) Function: Control Range 0 –10 Control Range 0 – 10 This parameter adjusts the apparent reflectivity of the virtual wall in the rear center sound field. DIGITAL SOUND SOUND FIELD FIELD PROGRAM PARAMETER PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS EDITING ■ REV. TIME (Reverberation Time) Function: This parameter adjusts the amount of time it takes for the dense, subsequent reverberation sound to decay by 60 dB (at 1 kHz). This changes the apparent size of the acoustic environment over an extremely wide range. Set a longer reverberation time for “dead” sources and listening room environments, and a shorter time for “live” sources and listening room environments. Reverberation Sound Source Reverberation Early Reflections 60 dB 60 dB Sound Source 60 dB REV. TIME REV. TIME Long Reverberation Short Reverberation Large value = 5.0 s ■ REV. DELAY (Reverberation Delay) This parameter adjusts the time difference between the beginning of the direct sound and the beginning of the reverberation sound. The larger the value, the later the reverberation sound begins. A later reverberation sound makes you feel like you are in a larger acoustic environment. ADVANCED OPERATION Level Description: Control Range 0 – 250 msec BASIC OPERATION Small value = 1.0 s Function: PREPARATION REV. TIME INTRODUCTION Description: Control Range 1.0 – 5.0 sec Sound Source (dB) 60 dB Reverberation Time REV. TIME ■ REV. LEVEL (Reverberation Level) Control Range 0 – 100 % This parameter adjusts the volume of the reverberation sound. The larger the value, the stronger the reverberation becomes. Sound Source APPENDIX Level Function: Description: ADDITIONAL INFORMATION REV. DELAY REV. LEVEL English Time 67 DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS For 6ch Stereo ■ CT LEVEL (Center Level) Function: These parameters adjust the volume level for each channel in 6-channel stereo mode. ■ RL LEVEL (Rear Left Level) Function: Music ■ PANORAMA 68 Control Range –3 – STD – +3 Gradually adjusts the soundfield either towards the front or towards the rear. ■ CT WIDTH (Center Width) Function: Control Range OFF/ON Extends the front stereo image to include the surround speakers for wraparound effect. ■ DIMENSION Function: Control Range 0 – 100 % These parameters adjust the volume level for each channel in 6-channel stereo mode. For PRO LOGIC Function: Control Range 0 – 100 % These parameters adjust the volume level for each channel in 6-channel stereo mode. ■ RC LEVEL (Rear Center Level) Function: Control Range 0 – 100 % These parameters adjust the volume level for each channel in 6-channel stereo mode. ■ RR LEVEL (Rear Right Level) Function: Control Range 0 – 100 % Control Range 0 – 7 Adjusts the center image from all three front speakers to varying degrees. TROUBLESHOOTING ■ General Problem Firmly connect the power cord. 19 The IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch on the rear panel is not fully set to the upper or lower position. Set the switch fully to the upper or lower position when this unit is in the standby mode. 13 The protection circuitry has been activated. Make sure all speaker wire connections on this unit and on all speakers are secure and that the wire for each connection does not touch anything other than its respective connection. — This unit has been exposed to a strong external electric shock (such as lightning and strong static electricity) Set this unit in the standby mode, disconnect the power cord, plug it back in after 30 seconds, and start operating. 19 The setting for the on-screen display is set to “DISPLAY OFF”. Select the full display or short display mode. 20 The BLUE BACK setting under “13 DISPLAY SET” on the SET MENU is set to OFF, and no video signal is input to this unit. Set BLUE BACK to AUTO to always show the OSD. 60 Incorrect input or output cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. 11, 12 An appropriate input source has not been selected. Select an appropriate input source with INPUT l / h or 6CH INPUT (or the input selector buttons). 24 The speaker connections are not secure. Secure the connections. The main speakers to be used have not been selected properly. Select the main speakers with SPEAKERS A and/or B. 24 The volume is turned down. Turn up the volume. 25 The sound is muted. Press MUTE or any operation buttons of this unit to cancel a mute and adjust the volume. 25 Digital signals other than PCM audio, Dolby Digital or DTS signal which this unit cannot reproduce are being input to this unit by playing a CD-ROM, etc. Play a source whose signals this unit can reproduce. — The output and input for the picture are connected to different types of video jacks. Make connections using the same type of jack (between S VIDEO, VIDEO (composite), or COMPONENT VIDEO jacks) for both the input and output. 14, 15 11, 12 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION APPENDIX The picture does not appear. The power cord is not connected or the plug is not completely inserted. ADVANCED OPERATION No sound and/or no picture. Refer to page BASIC OPERAIONT On-screen display does not appear. Remedy PREPARATION This unit fails to turn on when STANDBY/ ON (or SYSTEM POWER) is pressed, or enters in the standby mode soon after the power has been turned on. Cause INTRODUCTION Refer to the chart below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instruction below does not help, set this unit in the standby mode, disconnect the power cord, and contact the nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center. English 69 TROUBLESHOOTING Problem Cause The sound suddenly goes off. The protection circuit has been activated because of a short circuit, etc. Only the speaker on one side can be heard. No sound from the effect speakers. Remedy Check the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch is set to the appropriate position and then turn this unit back on. 13 Check the speaker wires are not touching each other and then turn this unit back on. — The sleep timer has functioned. Turn on the power, and play the source again. 62 The sound is muted. Press MUTE or any operation buttons of this unit to cancel a mute and adjust the volume. 25 Incorrect cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. 11, 12 Incorrect setting of “3 L/R BALANCE” on the SET MENU. Adjust it to the appropriate position. 55 The sound effect is off. Press STEREO/EFFECT to turn it on. 29 A Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS decoding DSP program is being used with material not encoded with Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS. Select another DSP program. A 96-kHz sampling digital signal is being input to this unit. No sound from the center speaker. No sound from the subwoofer. The output level of the center speaker is set to minimum. Raise the level of the center speaker. 61 “1A CENTER SP” on the SET MENU is set to NONE. Select the appropriate mode for your center speaker. 51 One of the Hi-Fi DSP programs (1 to 6 except for Game and 6ch Stereo) has been selected. Select another DSP program. 70 30 – 35 — The output level of the rear speakers is set to minimum. Raise the output level of the rear speakers. A monaural source is being played with the program 11. Select another DSP program. “1E LFE/BASS OUT” on the SET MENU is set to MAIN when a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is being played. Select SWFR or BOTH. 53 “1E LFE/BASS OUT” on the SET MENU is set to SWFR or MAIN when a 2-channel source is being played. Select BOTH. 53 The source does not contain low bass signals (90 Hz and below). Poor bass reproduction. 30 – 35 26 The source encoded with a Dolby Digital or DTS signal does not have a center channel signal. No sound from the rear speakers. Refer to page 61 30 – 35 — “1E LFE/BASS OUT” on the SET MENU is set to SWFR or BOTH and your system does not include a subwoofer. Select MAIN. The output mode for each speaker (main, center, rear, or rear center) on the SET MENU does not match your speaker configuration. Select the appropriate output mode for each speaker based on the size of the speakers in your configuration. 53 51 – 54 TROUBLESHOOTING No sound from the rear center speaker. “1D REAR CT SP” on the SET MENU is set to NONE. Select LRG or SML. 6.1/ES is not on. Press the 6.1/ES button on the remote control to turn it on. 28, 29 Incorrect cable connections. Firmly connect the audio plugs. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. 17 No connection from the turntable to the GND terminal. Connect the grounding cord of your turntable to the GND terminal of this unit. 16, 17 The volume level is low while playing a record. The record is being played on a turntable with an MC cartridge. The turntable should be connected to this unit through an MC-head amplifier. 16, 17 The volume level cannot be increased, or the sound is distorted. The component connected to the OUT (REC) jacks of this unit is turned off. Turn on the power to the component. 16, 17 The sound effect cannot be recorded. It is not possible to record the sound effect by a recording component. A source cannot be recorded by a digital recording component connected to the DIGITAL OUTPUT jack of this unit. A source component is only connected to the analog input jacks of this unit. Connect the source component to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks of this unit. The sound field parameters and some other settings on this unit cannot be changed. “14 MEMORY GUARD” on the SET MENU is set to ON. Select OFF. 60 This unit does not operate properly. The internal microcomputer has been frozen by an external electric shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or by a power supply with low voltage. Disconnect the AC power cord from the outlet and then plug it in again after about 30 seconds. — “CHECK SP WIRES” appears on the front panel display. Speaker cables are short circuited. Make sure all speaker cables are connected correctly. — The sound is degraded when listening with headphones connected to a tape deck or CD player that is connected to this unit. This unit is in the standby mode. Turn on the power of this unit. 19 There is noise interference from digital or high-frequency equipment, or this unit. This unit is too close to the digital or high-frequency equipment. Move this unit further away from such equipment. — This unit suddenly turns into the standby mode. The internal temperature becomes too high and the overheat protection circuitry has been activated. Wait until this unit cools down and then turn it back on. — A “humming” sound can be heard. Remedy Refer to page 53 PREPARATION Cause INTRODUCTION Problem — BASIC OPERAIONT 14 – 17 ADVANCED OPERATION ADDITIONAL INFORMATION APPENDIX English 71 TROUBLESHOOTING ■ Remote control Problem The remote control does not work nor function properly. The remote control does not “learn” new functions. Continuous functions such as volume adjustment are learned, but operate only for a moment before stopping. 72 Cause Remedy Refer to page Wrong distance or angle. The remote control will function within a maximum range of 6 m (20 feet) and no more than 30 degrees off-axis from the front panel. 7 Direct sunlight or lighting (from an inverter type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is striking the remote control sensor of this unit. Reposition this unit. — The batteries are weak. Replace all batteries with new ones and press RESET. 3 The manufacturer code has not been correctly set. Set the manufacturer code correctly. 38 Try to set the other codes of the same manufacturer. 38 The batteries of this remote control and/ or the other remote control are too weak. Replace the batteries. 3 The distance between the two remote controls is too much or too little. Place the remote controls at the proper distance. 39 The signal coding or modulation of the other remote control is not compatible with this remote control. Learning is not possible. — Memory capacity is full. Further learning is not possible without deleting unnecessary functions. 43 Even if the manufacturer code is correctly set, there are some models that do not respond to the remote control. Program the necessary functions independently into the programmable buttons on this unit’s remote control using the Learn feature. 39 The learning process is incomplete. Be sure to press and hold the function button on the other remote control until “OK” appears in the display window. 39 GLOSSARY DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog soundtracks of movies with a six-channel digital sound track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie theaters around the world. Digital Theater Systems Inc. has developed a home theater system so that you can enjoy the depth of sound and natural spatial representation of DTS digital surround in your home. This system is practically distortion-free, clear 6-channel sound (technically, a left, right and center channels, two rear channels, plus an LFE 0.1 channel as a subwoofer, for a total of 5.1 channels). ■ Dolby Pro Logic This channel is for the reproduction of low bass signals. The frequency range for this channel is 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This channel is counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a low frequency range compared to the full-range reproduced by the other 5 channels in a Dolby Digital or DTS 5.1 channel systems. ■ CINEMA DSP D I G I T A L Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect is best felt in a theater having many speakers and designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions, such as room size, wall material, number of speakers, and so on, can differ so widely, it’s inevitable that there are differences in the sound heard as well. Based on a wealth of actually measured data, YAMAHA CINEMA DSP uses YAMAHA original sound field technology to combine Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital and DTS systems to provide the visual and audio experience of movie theater in the listening room of your own home. ■ SILENT CINEMA DSP YAMAHA has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound field so that accurate representations of all the sound field programs can be enjoyed on headphones. APPENDIX Dolby Pro Logic is the improved technique to decode vast numbers of existing Dolby Surround programs. This new technology enables a discrete 5-channel playback with two left and right main channels, a center channel, and two left and right rear channels compared with one limited rear channel for the conventional Pro Logic technology. Also the music mode is available for 2channel sources in addition to the movie mode. ■ LFE 0.1 channel ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Neo: 6 decodes the conventional 2-channel sources for 6 channel playback by the specific decoder. It enables playback with the full-range channels with higher separation just like digital discrete signal playback. Two modes are available; “Music mode” for playing music sources and “Cinema mode” for movies. ADVANCED OPERATION ■ DTS Neo: 6 Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives you completely independent multi-channel audio. With three front channels (left, center and right), and two rear stereo channels, Dolby Digital provides five fullrange audio channels. With an additional channel especially for bass effects, called LFE (low frequency effect), the system has a total of 5.1 channels (LFE is counted as 0.1 channel). Using two-channel stereo for the rear speakers, more accurate moving sound effects and surround sound environment are possible than with Dolby Surround. The wide dynamic range (from maximum to minimum volume) reproduced by the five full-range channels and the precise sound orientation generated using digital sound processing provide listeners with previously unheard of excitement and realism. With this unit, any sound environment from monaural up to a 5.1-channel configuration can be freely selected for your enjoyment. BASIC OPERAIONT ■ Dolby Digital PREPARATION Dolby Surround uses a four analog channel recording system to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: two left and right main channels (stereo), a center channel for dialog (monaural), and a rear channel for special sound effects (monaural). The rear channel reproduces sound within a narrow frequency range. Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all video tapes and laser discs, and in many TV and cable broadcasts as well. The Dolby Pro Logic decoder built into this unit employs a digital signal processing system that automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel to enhance moving sound effects and directionality. ■ DTS (Digital Theater Systems) Digital Surround INTRODUCTION ■ Dolby Surround English 73 GLOSSARY ■ Virtual CINEMA DSP YAMAHA has developed a virtual CINEMA DSP algorithm that allows you to enjoy DSP sound field surround effects even without any rear speakers by using virtual rear speakers. It is even possible to enjoy virtual CINEMA DSP in a minimum two-speaker system that does not include a center speaker. ■ S VIDEO signal With S VIDEO signal system, the video signal normally transmitted using a pin cable is separated and transmitted as the Y signal for the luminance and the C signal for the chrominance through the S VIDEO cable. Using the S VIDEO jack eliminates video signal transmission loss and allows recording and playback of even more beautiful images. ■ Component video signal With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for the luminance and the PB/CB and PR/CR signals for the chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this system because each of these signals is independent. The component signal is also called the “color difference signal” because the luminance signal is subtracted from the color signal. A monitor with component input jacks is required in order to use the component signal for output. ■ PCM (Linear PCM) Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded and transmitted without using any compression. This is used as a method of recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses a technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per very small unit of time. Standing for “pulse code modulation”, the analog signal is encoded as pulses and then modulated for recording. 74 ■ Sampling frequency and number of quantized bits When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of times the signal is sampled per second is called the sampling frequency, while the degree of fineness when converting the sound level into a numeric value is called the number of quantized bits. The range of rates that can be played back is determined based on the sampling rate, while the dynamic range representing the sound level difference is determined by the number of quantized bits. In principle, the higher the sampling frequency, the wider the range of frequencies that can be played back, and the higher the number of quantized bits, the more finely the sound level can be reproduced. ■ I/O assignment (SET MENU) Although component is normally connected according to jack names shown on the rear panel, this unit includes a function that assigns jacks according to the component being connected. If the component being used differs from the component name shown for this unit’s component video input jacks or digital input/output jacks, it is possible to assign jacks according to the component being connected. This makes it possible to change the jack assignment and effectively connect more component. SPECIFICATIONS VIDEO SECTION • Minimum RMS Output Power for Main, Center, Rear 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.02% THD, 8 Ω ..................................... 120 W • Video Signal Type ...................................................................... PAL • DIN Standard Output Power 1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4 Ω ........................................................ 180 W • Dynamic Power (IHF) 8/6/4/2 Ω ........................................................ 145/180/240/330 W • Frequency Response CD to Main L/R ...................................... 10 Hz to 100 kHz, –3 dB • Total Harmonic Distortion 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 60 W, 8 Ω, Main L/R .............................. 0.008% • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network) PHONO MM to Main L/R (5 mV, shorted) ......................... 81 dB CD (250 mV, shorted) to Main L/R, Effect Off .................. 100 dB • S-Video Signal Level Y ................................................................................. 1 Vp-p/75 Ω C .......................................................................... 0.286 Vp-p/75 Ω • Component Video Signal Level Y ................................................................................. 1 Vp-p/75 Ω PB/CB, PR/CR ............................................................. 0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω • Signal to Noise Ratio ............................................................... 50 dB • Frequency Response (MONITOR OUT) Composite, S-Video ................................. 5 Hz to 10 MHz, –3 dB Component ................................................. DC to 60 MHz, –3 dB GENERAL • Power Supply .......................................................... AC 230V/50 Hz • Power Consumption ............................................................... 500 W Standby Mode ......................................................... approx. 1.2 W • Channel Separation (1 kHz/10 kHz) CD (5.1 kΩ terminated) to Main L/R ........................ 60 dB/45 dB • AC Outlets (Total 100 W maximum) [Europe model] ..................................................... 3 (SWITCHED) [U.K. model] ........................................................ 1 (SWITCHED) • Tone Control (Main L/R) BASS Boost/Cut ...................................................... ±10 dB/50 Hz TREBLE Boost/Cut ............................................... ±10 dB/20 kHz BASS EXTENSION .................................................. +6 dB/60 Hz • Dimension (W x H x D) .................................................................... 435 x 191 x 468 mm • Weight ...................................................................................... 21 kg • Accessories ............................................................... Remote control Batteries Connection guide Power cord [Europe model only] * Specifications are subject to change without notice. • Output Level REC OUT .............................................................. 150 mV/0.9 kΩ PRE OUT .................................................................. 1.0 V/1.2 kΩ SUBWOOFER .......................................................... 4.0 V/1.2 kΩ ADVANCED OPERATION • Input Sensitivity CD, etc .................................................................... 150 mV/47 kΩ PHONO ................................................................... 2.5 mV/47 kΩ 6CH INPUT .................................................... 150 mV/40 – 47 kΩ BASIC OPERAIONT • Residual Noise (IHF-A Network) Main L/R ................................................................ 150 µV or less • Phones Output ........................................................... 150 mV/100 Ω PREPARATION • Damping Factor 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω ................................................. 200 or more • Composite Video Signal Level ...................................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω INTRODUCTION AUDIO SECTION ADDITIONAL INFORMATION APPENDIX English 75 GB DSP-AX3200 DSP-AX3200 YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A. CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, F.R. OF GERMANY ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD1 7JS, ENGLAND SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA Printed in Japan V817900 AV AMPLIFIER AMPLIFICATEUR AUDIO-VIDEO OWNER’S MANUAL MODE D’EMPLOI BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG BRUKSANVISNING MANUALE DI ISTRUZIONI MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES GEBRUIKSAANWIJZING